SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions

Part 2
Frequency Control (FC)

Edition: AA Order-No.: 6SE7087-6XX10

General 08.96

Overview of the MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions:

Operating Instructions consists of

Part 1 Part 2
6SE708_-_AD10 6SE708_-_AD70 6SE708_-_XX10
6SE708_-_AD20 6SE708_-_AD70 6SE708_-_XX20
6SE708_-_AD30 6SE708_-_AD70 6SE708_-_XX30
6SE708_-_BD10 6SE708_-_BD70 6SE708_-_XX10
6SE708_-_BD20 6SE708_-_BD70 6SE708_-_XX20
6SE708_-_BD30 6SE708_-_BD70 6SE708_-_XX30
6SE708_-_AH10 6SE708_-_AH70 6SE708_-_XX10
6SE708_-_AH20 6SE708_-_AH70 6SE708_-_XX20
6SE708_-_AH30 6SE708_-_AH70 6SE708_-_XX30
6SE708_-_BH10 6SE708_-_BH70 6SE708_-_XX10
6SE708_-_BH20 6SE708_-_BH70 6SE708_-_XX20
6SE708_-_BH30 6SE708_-_BH70 6SE708_-_XX30
6SE708_-_BM20 6SE708_-_BM70 6SE708_-_XX20

You will receive Parts 1 and 2 of the Operating Instructions when you use this Order No. Parts 1
and 2 can be individually ordered by specifying the particular Order No.
_-_ stands for the language code, e.g. 0-0 for German Editions.

The following foreign language Editions of these Operating Instructions are available:

Language English French Spanish Italian

Language code 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-2

These Operating Instructions are valid for software release V1.3.

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its con-

tents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders
will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by
patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are
reserved.

We have checked the contents of this document to ensure that they

coincide with the described hardware and software. However,
differences cannot be completely excluded, so that we do not
accept any guarantee for complete conformance. However, the
information in this document is regularly checked and necessary
corrections will included in subsequent editions. We are grateful for
any recommendations for improvement. SIMOVERT Registered Trade Mark

 Siemens AG 1996 All rights reserved

08.96 General

Contents

0 Definitions ........................................................................................................................... 0-7

Safety and operating instructions for drive converters ............................................................ 0-9

1 Control terminal strip and serial interface ......................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Connectors for the control terminal strip................................................................................. 1-1

1.1.1 Connecting-up the control cables........................................................................................... 1-2

1.2 Terminal connection .............................................................................................................. 1-3

1.2.1 Connecting-up the parameterizing unit (PMU)........................................................................ 1-4

1.3 Measures to maintain the radio interference suppression regulations..................................... 1-5

2 Operator control.................................................................................................................. 2-1

2.1 Operator control elements ..................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 Displays ............................................................................................................... 2-2

2.3 Structure ............................................................................................................................... 2-3

3 General explanation of the terminology and functional scope of the unit ...................... 3-1

3.1 Converter open-loop/closed-loop control versions .................................................................. 3-1

3.2 Process data ......................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.3 Indexed parameters............................................................................................................... 3-2

3.4 Data sets............................................................................................................................... 3-2

4 Start-up ................................................................................................................................ 4-1

4.1 Capacitor forming .................................................................................................................. 4-1

4.2 First start-up.......................................................................................................................... 4-2

4.2.1 Parameterization „Standard application“ ................................................................................ 4-3
4.2.2 Parameterization „Expert application“ .................................................................................... 4-4

4.3 Drive start-up when the drive converter is controlled through an external main contactor ....... 4-7

4.4 Drive start-up after enabling additional software functions or hardware options ...................... 4-9

4.5 Simple application examples for connecting process data with connection assignment ........ 4-10
4.5.1 Factory setting..................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.5.2 Manual/automatic operation (Basic/reserve changeover) ..................................................... 4-11

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 0-3

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
General 08.96

5 Process data........................................................................................................................ 5-1

5.1 Control word (control word 1 and control word 2) ................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Control word display using the 7-segment display on the PMU .............................................. 5-1
5.1.2 Control word 1 (Visualization parameter r550 or r967) ........................................................... 5-2
5.1.3 Control word 2 (Visualization parameter r551) ....................................................................... 5-3
5.1.4 Selecting the source for control words 1 and 2....................................................................... 5-4
5.1.5 Significance of control word- (1 and 2) commands................................................................. 5-6

5.2 Status word ......................................................................................................................... 5-12

5.2.1 Status word 1 (visualization parameter r552 or r968) ........................................................... 5-13
5.2.2 Status word 2 (visualization parameter r553) ....................................................................... 5-14
5.2.3 Significance of the status word messages ........................................................................... 5-15

5.3 Setpoints ............................................................................................................................. 5-20

5.3.1 Overview of the setpoints .................................................................................................... 5-21
5.3.2 Selecting the possible setpoint sources ............................................................................... 5-21

5.4 Actual values....................................................................................................................... 5-22

6 Interfaces ............................................................................................................................. 6-1

6.1 Binary inputs ......................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.2 Binary outputs ....................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.3 Analog inputs ........................................................................................................................ 6-2

6.3.1 Analog input as setpoint input................................................................................................ 6-2
6.3.2 Analog input as speed actual value input ............................................................................... 6-5

6.4 Analog output ........................................................................................................................ 6-7

6.5 Serial interfaces..................................................................................................................... 6-9

6.5.1 Basic converter interface SST1 ............................................................................................. 6-9
6.5.2 Dual port RAM (DPR for SCB, TSY, CB, TB)....................................................................... 6-10

6.6 Ramp-function generator (RFG) and limiting stage in front of the ramp-function generator... 6-11
6.6.1 Ramp-function generator, RFG............................................................................................ 6-11
6.6.2 Limit value stage in front of the ramp-function generator...................................................... 6-13

7 Open-loop and closed-loop control types......................................................................... 7-1

7.1 V/f characteristic.................................................................................................................... 7-1

8 Start-up functions ............................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Function selection (P052) ..................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1.1 Factory setting (P052 = 1) ..................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Initialization (MLFB input) (P052 = 2)..................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.2.1 Download (P052 = 3)............................................................................................................. 8-4
8.1.3 Hardware configuration (P052 = 4) ........................................................................................ 8-5
8.1.4 Drive setting (P052 = 5)......................................................................................................... 8-6
8.1.5 Automatic parameterization (P052 = 6).................................................................................. 8-6
8.1.6 Motor identification at standstill (P052 = 7) ............................................................................ 8-7

0-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 General

9 Functions (software) ........................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 WEA (automatic restart) ........................................................................................................ 9-1

9.2 KIP (Kinetic buffering)............................................................................................................ 9-3

9.3 Flexible response .................................................................................................................. 9-4

9.4 Vdmax closed-loop control..................................................................................................... 9-7

9.5 DC current brake ................................................................................................................... 9-8

9.6 Restart-on-the-fly................................................................................................................... 9-9

9.7 Technology controller .......................................................................................................... 9-11

10 Function diagrams ............................................................................................................ 10-1

11 Parameter list..................................................................................................................... 11-1

11.1 General Observation Parameters ........................................................................................ 11-2

11.2 General Parameters ............................................................................................................ 11-4

11.3 Drive Data ........................................................................................................................... 11-6

11.4 Hardware Configuration ....................................................................................................... 11-7

11.5 Motor Data .......................................................................................................................... 11-8

11.6 Control .............................................................................................................................. 11-10

11.7 Functions .......................................................................................................................... 11-19

11.8 Setpoint Channel ............................................................................................................... 11-26

11.9 Control and Status Word ................................................................................................... 11-34

11.10 Analog Input/Output........................................................................................................... 11-44

11.11 Communications................................................................................................................ 11-47

11.12 Diagnosis .......................................................................................................................... 11-51

11.13 Modulator .......................................................................................................................... 11-54

11.14 Factory Parameters........................................................................................................... 11-55

11.15 Special Parameters ........................................................................................................... 11-55

11.16 Profile Parameters............................................................................................................. 11-56

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 0-5

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
General 08.96

12 Fault and alarm messages................................................................................................ 12-1

12.1 Fault messages................................................................................................................... 12-1

12.2 Alarm messages.................................................................................................................. 12-8

13 Logbook............................................................................................................................. 13-1

14 Index and Abbreviations................................................................................................... 14-1

14.1 Index ................................................................................................................................... 14-1

14.2 List of abbreviations............................................................................................................. 14-3

0-6 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 General

Definitions
• QUALIFIED PERSONAL
For the purpose of these instructions and product labels, a "Qualified person" is someone who is familiar
with the installation, mounting, start-up and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. He or she
must have the following qualifications:
1. Trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in
accordance with established safety procedures.
2. Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety
procedures.
3. Trained in rendering first aid.

• DANGER
For the purpose of these instructions and product labels, "Danger" indicates death, severe personal injury or
substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.

• WARNING
For the purpose of these instructions and product labels, "Warning" indicates death, severe personal injury
or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

• CAUTION
For the purpose of these instructions and product labels, "Caution" indicates that minor personal injury or
material damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

• NOTE
For the purpose of these instructions, "Note" indicates information about the product or the respective part of
the Instruction Manual which is essential to highlight.

NOTE
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every
possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for
the purchaser's purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Siemens sales office.
The contents of this Instruction Manual shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement,
committment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Siemens. The warranty
contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Siemens. Any statements contained
herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 0-7

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
General 08.96

CAUTION

Components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge

(ESD)

The converters contain components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge. These components
can be easily destroyed if not carefully handled. If you have to handle electronic boards please observe the
following:
♦ Electronic boards should only be touched when absolutely necessary.
♦ The human body must be electrically discharged before touching an electronic board
♦ Boards must not come into contact with highly insulating materials - e.g. plastic foils, insulated desktops,
articles of clothing manufactured from man-made fibers
♦ Boards must only be placed on conductive surfaces
♦ When soldering, the soldering iron tip must be grounded
♦ Boards and components should only be stored and transported in conductive packaging (e.g. metalized
plastic boxes, metal containers)
♦ If the packing material is not conductive, the boards must be wrapped with a conductive packaging
material, e.g. conductive foam rubber or household aluminum foil.

The necessary ECB protective measures are clearly shown in the following diagram:
a = Conductive floor surface d = ESD overall
b = ESD table e = ESD chain
c = ESD shoes f = Cubicle ground connection

d
d d
b b
e e

f f f f f

a c c c
a a
Sitting Standing Standing / Siting

0-8 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 General

WARNING
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation.
Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in severe personal injury or property
damage.
Only qualified personnel should work on or around the equipment after first becoming
thoroughly familiar with all warning and safety notices and maintenance procedures
contained herein.
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on proper handling,
installation, operation and maintenance.

Safety and operating instructions for drive converters

Safety and operating instructions

for drive converters
(in conformity with the low-voltage directive 73/23/EEC)

1. General

In operation, drive converters, depending on their degree of protection, may have live, uninsulated, and
possibly also moving or rotating parts, as well as hot surfaces.
In case of inadmissible removal of the required covers, of improper use, wrong installation or maloperation,
there is the danger of serious personal injury and damage to property.
For further information, see documentation.
All operations serving transport, installation and commissioning as well as maintenance are to be carried out
by skilled technical personnel (Observe IEC 364 or CENELEC HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and IEC 664 or
DIN/VDE 0110 and national accident prevention rules!).
For the purposes of these basic safety instructions, "skilled technical personnel" means persons who are
familiar with the installation, mounting, commissioning and operation of the product and have the
qualifications needed for the performance of their functions.

2. Intended use

Drive converters are components designed for inclusion in electrical installations or machinery.
In case of installation in machinery, commissioning of the drive converter (i.e. the starting of normal operation)
is prohibited until the machinery has been proved to conform to the provisions of the directive 89/392/EEC
(Machinery Safety Directive - MSD). Account is to be taken of EN 60204.
Commissioning (i.e. the starting of normal opertion) is admissible only where conformity with the EMC
directive (89/336/EEC) has been established.
The drive converters meet the requirements of the low-voltage directive 73/23/EEC. They are subject to the
harmonized standards of the series prEN 50178/DIN VDE 0160 in conjunction with EN 60439-1/ VDE 0660,
part 500, and EN 60146/ VDE 0558.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 0-9

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
General 08.96

The technical data as well as information concerning the supply conditions shall be taken from the rating plate
and from the documentation and shall be strictly observed.

3. Transport, storage

The instructions for transport, storage and proper use shall be complied with.
The climatic conditions shall be in conformity with prEN 50178.

4. Installation

The installation and cooling of the appliances shall be in accordance with the specifications in the pertinent
documentation.
The drive converters shall be protected against excessive strains. In particular, no components must be bent
or isolating distances altered in the course of transportation or handling. No contact shall be made with
electronic components and contacts.
Drive converters contain electrostatic sensitive components which are liable to damage through improper use.
Electric components must not be mechanically damaged or destroyed (potential health risks).

5. Electrical connection

When working on live drive converters, the applicable national accident prevention rules (e.g. VBG 4) must be
complied with.
The electrical installation shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant requirements (e.g. cross-
sectional areas of conductors, fusing, PE connection). For further information, see documentation.
Instructions for the installation in accordance with EMC requirements, like screening, earthing, location of
filters and wiring, are contained in the drive converter documentation. They must always be complied with,
also for drive converters bearing a CE marking. Observance of the limit values required by EMC law is the
responsibility of the manufacturer of the installation or machine.

6. Operation

Installations which include drive converters shall be equipped with additional control and protective devices in
accordance with the relevant applicable safety requirements, e.g. Act respecting technical equipment,
accident prevention rules etc. Changes to the drive converters by means of the operating software are
admissible.
After disconnection of the drive converter from the voltage supply, live appliance parts and power terminals
must not be touched immediately because of possibly energized capacitors. In this respect, the corresponding
signs and markings on the drive converter must be respected.
During operation, all covers and doors shall be kept closed.

7. Maintenance and servicing

The manufacturer's documentation shall be followed.

Keep safety instructions in a safe place!

0-10 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Control terminal strip and serial interface

1 Control terminal strip and serial interface

WARNING

The unit must be disconnected and locked-out before control cables are connected to the
CU.

The unit can be controlled via the following interfaces:

♦ Control terminal strip -X101 and -X102 on the electronics board CU
♦ RS485 serial interface (SST1); control terminal strip -X100 on the electronics board CU
♦ OP operator control panel (Chapter "Options" in the Operating Instructions, Part 1)
♦ RS485 and RS232 serial interfaces (SST1) on the PMU -X300
♦ RS485 (SST2) serial interfaces; control terminal strip -X100 on the electronics board CU.

CAUTION
The CU board contains components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
These components can be very easily destroyed if not handled with caution.
Also refer to the ECB cautionary measures in the Section, General Information.

1.1 Connectors for the control terminal strip

The connectors for the control terminal strip are supplied (loose) with the unit.
Cables with cross-sections from 0.14 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG: 26 to 16), or
1 mm2 (AWG: 18) can be connected using stranded wire with lugs at the
connector (recommended: 0.5 mm2 (AWG: 20)). The connectors can be
identified using the pin numbers (Table 1.1); the connector position on the
board is illustrated in Fig. 1.1. Two screen clamps and four cable ties are
required from the loose components supplied to connect the control cables.
PMU

The remaining connector X9, included loose with the equipment, is required
to control a main contactor and for connecting an external power supply -X100
(Section „Auxiliary power supply/main contactor“ in the Operating -X101
Instructions, Part 1).

Connector Labeling -X102

X100 eight-pin, coded 1 2 3 CU1 6 7 8

X101 eight-pin, coded 13 14 15 CU1 18 19 20
X102 ten-pin 25 26 27 28 CU1 31 32 33 34 Fig. 1.1 Control terminals on CU

Table 1.1 Connectors for the control terminal strip are supplied loose

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 1-1

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Control terminal strip and serial interface 08.96

1.1.1 Connecting-up the control cables

NOTE
As a general rule, it is recommended that shielded control wiring be used for signals connected directly to the
chassis, in order to achieve maximum noise immunity. The shield must be grounded at both ends.
To avoid noise coupling, control wires which are directly connected to the chassis should be separated from
power wiring by a minimum distance of 20 cm.
For drives wired in approved factories, internal wiring practices which achieve acceptable noise immunity
results may be used for drive connections.
Control- and cables must cross each other at an angle of 90°.

Latch screen clamp into place

C ab le tie C onnector ∅ ≤ 15 mm ∅ ≤ 7.5 mm ∅ ≤ 5 mm

P ull-bac k screen and

retain, e.g. w ith
A da pt le ngth to shrink tubing
typ e o f co nstru ction

D o not overextend R elease clam p

spring
35 C om pre ss th e calam p w ith you r h an d
or us ing a screw drive r an d withd raw tow a rd s
th e top..
Cautio n!
Screening Th e c la m p s h av e s ha rp e dg es!

Fig. 1.2 Connecting-up the control cables and the technique for using the screen clamps

The "EMC screened housing" option should be used if so many control cables are required that two screen
clamps are not sufficient.

Order No.:
♦ Type A 6SE7090-0XA87-3CA0
♦ Type B 6SE7090-0XB87-3CA0
♦ Type C 6SE7090-0XC87-3CA0
♦ Type D 6SE7090-0XD87-3CA0

1-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Control terminal strip and serial interface

1.2 Terminal connection

Connecting Term. Function, notes

example
-X100
1 Transmit- and receive line -RS485, differential input / -output, positive
(RS485R/T+)
2 Transmit- and receive line -RS485, differential input / -output, negative
(RS485R/T−)
3 Transmit output RS485 Standard, differential output, positive (RS485T+)
4 Transmit output RS485 Standard, differential output, negative (RS485T−)
5 Reference potential, RS485 interface
The interface at connector -X100 is available again in the -X300 parame-
NOTE terizing unit. Only one of the two interfaces may be used, + Chapter 4
„Start-up“).

NOTE Binary output 1 is connected at -X9:4,5 main contactor control

6 Binary output 2 (changeover contact) reference contact

7 Binary output 2 (changeover contact) NO contact
8 Binary output 2 (changeover contact) NC contact

NOTE Load capability of the binary outputs: 60 V AC, 60 VA, cosϕ = 1

60 V AC, 16 VA, cosϕ = 0.4
60 V DC, 24 W
Inductive loads, e.g. contactors, relays, for DC voltage loads, must be damped
using a diode or varistor, and for AC loads, with a varistor or RC element.
-X101
13 +24 V, 150 mA for binary inputs and outputs
14 Ref. potential for 24 V (ground)
15 Ref. potential for binary inputs 1 to 5 for ext. signal voltage
16 Binary input 1
17 Binary input 2
18 Binary input 3
19 Binary input 4
20 Binary input 5
Signal sensitivity H = 24 V (13 V to 33 V) Imax = 15.7 mA
NOTE of the binary inputs: L = 0 V (−0.6 V to 3 V)

Table 1.2 Connecting example for control terminal strips -X100 and -X101

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 1-3

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Control terminal strip and serial interface 08.96

Connecting Term. Function, notes

example
-X102
25 +10 V / 5 mA, ±2 %, for setpoint pot., non-floating
26 −10 V / 5 mA, ± 2%, for setpoint pot., non-floating
271) Analog input 1 (0 V to ±10 V)
28 Ref. potential, analog input 1
291) Analog input 1 (0 mA to 20 mA or. 4 mA to 20 mA) int. load resistor 250 Ω
302) Analog input 2 (0 V to ±10 V)
31 Ref. potential, analog input 2
322) Analog input 2 (0 mA to 20 mA or 4 mA to 20 mA) int. load resistor 250 Ω
33 Ref. potential, analog output 1
e.g. measuring
meter 34 Analog output 1 (0 V to 10 V) permissible load ≤ 5 mA =
^ > 2 kΩ
Terminals 33 and 34: To increase the noise immunity of the signals, an
NOTE isolating amplifier should be connected between the analog output and
measuring unit for cables > 4 m.
Table 1.3 Connecting-up example for the control terminal strip -X102

1.2.1 Connecting-up the parameterizing unit (PMU)

A serial connection to automation unit or a PC can be realized via

connector X300 on the PMU. Thus, the unit can be controlled and
operated from the central control station or control room.
For degree of protection IP20 (option), there is no PMU. The OP1
operator control panel must be removed to connect a PC or an
automation unit to X300 (to remove OP1, release the 2 mounting
screws on the inside of the doors).
P X300

5 4 3 2 1

9 8 7 6

Fig. 1.3 Parameterizing unit (PMU)

PMU -X300 Description

1 Not assigned
2 Receive line, RS232 standard (V.24)
3 Transmit- and receive line, RS485, two-wire, positive differential input/output
4 RTS (request to send)
5 Ref. potential (ground)
6 5 V power supply for OP
7 Transmit line, RS232 standard (V.24)
8 Transmit- and receive line RS485, two-wire, negative differential input/output
9 Ref. potential for RS232- or RS485 interface (EMC suppressed).
Table 1.4 Connector assignment for interface -X300

1) Only one of the two terminals, 27 or 29, may be assigned

2) Only one of the two terminals, 30 or 32, may be assigned

1-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Control terminal strip and serial interface

1.3 Measures to maintain the radio interference suppression regulations

The drives must be installed and mounted according to the „Installation Instructions for EMC-correct installation
and mounting of drives“ (Order No. 6SE7087-6CX87-8CE0).

The limit values for industrial environments can be maintained without radio interference suppression filter.
B1 radio interference suppression filters must be used for environments other than industrial environments.

The following points must be observed regarding radio interference suppression regulations:

♦ Grounding
Converters generate radio interference noise. This noise should be fed back to the source through the
lowest possible ohmic connection (ground connection cross-section ≥ supply connection cross-section).
Use the best grounding possibility (e.g. mounting panel, grounding cable, grounding bar) when installing
converters and optional radio interference suppression filters. Connect all connector housings together
through the largest possible surface area.
For radio interference suppression, the cross-section (observe the safety regulations under fault conditions),
is not so important, but the contact surface, as high-frequency noise currents do not flow through the
complete cross-section, but essentially on the outside surface of a conductor (skin effect).

♦ Screening
In order to reduce noise and maintain the radio interference suppression level, the following should be
maintained
• screened cables should be used between the converter output and motor
• screen control cables must be used.
• route control- and power cables separately; min. clearance, 20 cm.
The screen must be connected to ground potential at both ends.

♦ Control cables and power cables may only cross at an angle of 90 °.

♦ Filter
The radio interference suppression filter must be connected directly in front of the rectifier- or rectifier and
regenerative feedback unit. The housings must be connected electrically with one another.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 1-5

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Operator control

2 Operator control
The converter can be controlled via:
♦ the PMU (Parameterization Unit)
♦ the control terminal strip on the CU (Chapter 1 „Control terminal strip“)
♦ the OP1 operator control panel (Chapter „Options“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 1)
♦ the RS485 and RS232 serial interface on PMU -X300

When the equipment is shipped,

the drive converter is controlled Seven-segment displays
and parameterized by the para-
meterizing unit (PMU) on the
front side of the unit. Reversing key
On key Raise key
For option M20 (degree of protec-
tion IP20), the unit is controlled Changeover key,
Off key operator control level
and parameterized via the OP1.
P Lower key
Operator control using the PMU
is described in this section. X300

Fig. 2.1 Parameterization unit

2.1 Operator
control elements

Operator control elements Function

Converter switch on (standard).
For faults: Return to the fault display.
Command is effective when the key is released.
Converter shutdown depending on the parameterization of OFF1, OFF2 or
OFF3 (P554 to P560).
Command becomes effective when the key is released.
Field reversal / reversing for the appropriate parameterization (P571 and
P572).
Command becomes effective when the key is released.
Changeover from parameter number to parameter value. In conjunction with
P other keys, additional functions (refer to Figs. 2.2 to 2.5).
Command becomes effective when the key is released.
Values (raise, lower) change as long as the keys are depressed.
,
Depress P and hold, then depress the second key. The command becomes
P P effective when the key is released (e.g. fast changeover).
+ resp. +

Table 2.1 Function of the operator control elements on the PMU

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 2-1

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Operator control 08.96

2.2 Displays

Parameter number Index Parameter value

Pos. actual value Neg. actual value
e.g e.g e.g.. e.g.
Basic converter
Visualization −−−
parameters Technology board

Basic converter
Setting
parameters Technology board

Table 2.2 Displaying visualization- and setting parameters on the PMU

Actual value Parameter value Alarm Fault

not possible
Display

Table 2.3 Status display on the PMU

NOTE
The parameter description is provided in Chapter 11 „Parameter list“.

2-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Operator control

2.3 Structure

Ready-to-switch-on

Operating display

P
Parameter number level

P P

P P
Fast + P P P + Fast
changeover + + + changeover

next highest
parameter parameter

P P P

Parameter no
indexed?

yes

Index level
highest
index

P P P

Parameter value level

highest lowest Step from the

value value highest to the
lowest value
P P P only possible
with a setpoint
connection
(e.g. P443)

Return to parameter number

Fig. 2.2 Operator control structure using the PMU

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 2-3

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Operator control 08.96

Display before fault Fault If several fault exist, the particular fault can
be selected using the keys.
P P P P
+ + P- + key: Jump into the parameterizing
Fault Fault
acknowl. acknowl. level, if, e.g., fault
with fault acknowledgement is not
Fault Fault possible.
not not
acknowl. acknowl.

Fig. 2.3 Operator control structure of the PMU for faults

after
delay time
Display before Alarm
If several alarms are present, then display
alarm automatically switches to the higher alarm.
P P P- + -
Cause of or Cause of or
the alarm the alarm or key: Jump into the parameterizing
removed removed level independent of the alarms
or or which are present

Fig. 2.4 Operator control structure of the PMU for alarms

If several faults or alarms exist, a point appears at the right in the display .

P
+
The shift is only possible in the parameter value level.
P
+

Fig. 2.5 Shifting the PMU display for parameter

values with more than 4 digits

2-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 General explanation of the terminology and functional scope of the unit

3 General explanation of the terminology and

functional scope of the unit
Abbreviations:
♦ Abbreviations used: + Chapter 14 „Index and Abbreviations“

3.1 Converter open-loop/closed-loop control versions

♦ Open-loop control versions (also suitable for multi-motor drives):
• V/f characteristic:
Open-loop frequency control with constant voltage/frequency ratio, or a voltage/frequency ratio entered
via a characteristic
• V/f characteristic, for textile applications:
as for the V/f characteristic, however certain functions where the frequency setpoint (+ function
diagrams) is inhibited for textile machine applications.
♦ Closed-loop control version:
• V/f + closed-loop speed control (V/f characteristic with higher-level closed-loop speed control):
In addition to the specified V/f characterstic, in order to achieve an especially high speed accuracy, the
motor speed, measured using a tachometer, is fed to a higher-level speed controller.

Tip: For digital tachos and for certain analog tachos, option boards are required!

3.2 Process data

The following is understood under process data:
♦ Setpoints and control commands, which „directly“ influence the drive operating status,
♦ Actual values and status messages, which are „directly“ output from the drive.
„Directly“ means: Each process data change is realized immediately and without any acknowledgement -
or handshake mechanisms.
Only then can fast process responses be achieved

Contrary to the process data, a parameter value change is subject to a specified mechanism, and consists of
task and checkback signal.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 3-1

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
General explanation of the terminology and functional scope of the unit 08.96

Converter

• Binary inputs BE • Binary outputs BA

(terminals) (terminals)
• Parameterizing unit (PMU) Commands Messages • Parameterizing unit (PMU)
• Op. control panel (OP) "Control word" "Status word" • Op. control panel (OP)
• Serial interfaces • Serial interfaces
(SST, SCB, CB, TB) (SST, SCB, CB, TB)
Setpoint channel

Open-/
closed loop
• Analog inputs AE control • Analog outputs AA
(terminals) (terminals)
• Parameterizing unit (PMU) Setpoints Actual values • Parameterizing unit (PMU)
• Op. control panel (OP) • Op. control panel (OP)
• Serial interfaces • Serial interfaces
(SST, SCB, CB, TB) (SST, SCB, CB, TB)

Sources Process data Destinations

Fig. 3.1 Process data

3.3 Indexed parameters

Indexed parameters are sub-divided into various „indices“ (briefly: i001, i002, etc.), in which the particular
parameter values can be entered.
The significance of the „indices“ of the particular parameter (parameter number) can be taken from the chapter
11 „Parameter list“.

Example: Index1
P650 i001 = 0 Configuration analog input 1 : -10V...+10V or -20mA...+20mA

Index2
i002 = 2 Configuration analog input 2 : 4 to 20mA with wire breakage monitoring

3.4 Data sets

„Indexed“ parameters can be sub-divided according to data sets (indexed).
There are three kinds of data sets:
♦ SDS (setpoint channel data set) 1 and 2:
2 setpoint channel data sets which can be changed over; e.g. for production-related different drive ramp-up
and ramp-down times.
♦ Basic/reserve (basic- or reserve setting):
e.g. for changing over between manual and automatic operation
♦ MDS (motor data set) 1 and 2:
2 motor data sets which can be changed over; e.g. for operating different motor types from one converter.
The data sets are selected via the „control word“, and are read-out in r410, r012 and r152.
+ Chapter 10 „Function diagrams“

3-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Start-up

4 Start-up
The drive converter must be ready. This means, that it must be installed and connected-up according to the
information in the hardware description.

NOTE
Forming: If the drive converter was continuously shutdown for longer than a year, or not connected, then
the DC link capacitors must be formed.

4.1 Capacitor forming

The DC link capacitors must be re-formed if the converter Position Example
has been non-operational for more than one year. If the
converter was started-up within one year after having 1 and 2 A- Manufacturing location
been shipped (serial number on the rating plate), it is not 3 E 1994
necessary to re-form the DC link capacitors F 1995
H 1996
For AC-AC, as well as for DC-AC drive converters,
4 1 to 9 January to September
forming is realized by switching-in a rectifier and resistor,
O October
which are connected to the DC link (circuit configuration:
N November
refer to Figs. Fig. 4.2 and Fig. 4.3). The drive converter
D December
feed in this case must be shutdown (disconnected)!
A second possibility exists for DC-AC units. The DC 5 to 14 Not relevant for forming
busbar voltage is slowly increased up to the rated drive
Table 4.1 Serial number structure: A-E60147512345
converter input voltage during the forming time.
The forming time is dependent on the time for which the
drive converter stood. (refer to Fig. 4.1)
Forming
time in h
Recommended components
6
A R C
5
3AC 208 V to 415 V
SKD 50 / 12 220 Ω / 100 W 22 nF / 1600 V 4
DC 280 V to 310 V
3
3AC 510 V to 620 V
SKD 62 / 16 470 Ω / 100 W 22 nF / 1600 V 2
DC 380 V to 460 V
1
3AC 675 V to 930 V
SKD 62 / 18 680 Ω / 100 W 22 nF / 1600 V
DC 500 V to 690 V 1 2 3 4 5
Non-operational time in years
Table 4.2 Recommended components for circuits acc. to Fig. 4.2 and Fig. 4.3
Fig. 4.1 Forming time as a function for the time
which the converter was non-operational

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 4-1

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Start-up 08.96

Forming
F orm ing

A
Disconnect
A

PE1 U1/ V1/ W1/

C
L1 L2 L3

X9:1 R
X9:2 C
C/L+ PE1
R C /L+ D /L -
D/L-
X 9:1
X 9:2
6SE70

6SE70
U2/ V2/ W2/
PE2 T1 T2 T3 U2/ V2 / W 2/
PE2 T1 T2 T3

Fig. 4.2 Circuit to form AC-AC units

Fig. 4.3 Circuit to form DC-AC units

4.2 First start-up

The converter is supplied with the „Factory setting“ (+ Chapter 11 „Parameter list“) and access stage 2
(standard mode). That means:
♦ The converter data correspond to the converter type, MLFB (Order No.) (converter initialized).
♦ A 50 Hz induction motor, adapted to the converter type, is parameterized, which is operated using the
V/f control (open-loop).
If the required converter functions are already realized with the factory setting, the converter can be
immediately switched-on and operated. Further parameterization is not required.

Parameterization is realized according to the following sections:

4.2.1 As „Standard application with V/f characteristic without hardware options“ for simple
applications.
or 4.2.2 As „Expert application“ for sophisticated applications (e.g.: Closed-loop control, data set
changeover, interface operation, etc.) of if hardware options are available.

4-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Start-up

4.2.1 Parameterization „Standard application“

P050 = Language:
0 = German, 1 = English, 2 = Espanol, 3 = Francais, 4 = Italiano

P051 = 2 Access „stage standard mode“

P052 = 5 Function selection. „drive setting“

P071 = Converter supply voltage [V] : AC units: Line supply voltage

DC units: DC link voltage
Motor rating plate data observe config. (star/delta)!

1 Motor type: 0 = IEC-motor (international standard)

P100.i001 =
1 = NEMA-motor (US standard)
0
P101.i001 = P101.i001 = Rated motor voltage [V]

P102.i001 = P102.i001 = Rated motor current [A]

(multi-motor drives: sum of all the currents)

P104.i001 = P105.i001 = IEC motor:: Cos Phi (n)

NEMA motor: Rated output [Hp] (multi-motor drives: sum af all the
outputs)

P106.i001 = Efficiency [%]

P107.i001 = Rated motor frequency [Hz] The maximum frequency is a function of

P163 „Control mode“

P108.i001 = Rated motor speed [RPM]

Characteristic: 0: linear characteristic (constant-torque drives)

P165.i001 =
1: parabolic characteristic (fans and pumps)

NOTE
Motor yes
protection acc. to The motor temperature is estimated using the motor current.
UL spec. The motor is reliably protected with the factory setting
no P362 = Motor cooling: 0: naturally ventilated
1: force ventilated
P363 = Motor thermal time constant

P364.i002 = 0 P364.i002 = Motor load limit 1 ... 300 %

P420 = Rated system frequency [Hz]

Rated motor operating frequency in the system

P452.i001 = Max. frequency, clockwise phase sequence [Hz]

P453.i001 = Max. frequency, counter-clockwise phase sequence[Hz]

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 4-3

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Start-up 08.96

P052 = 7 Function selection „motor identification at standstill“

(includes „ground fault test“ and „automatic parameterization“)
depress P key
Switch on NOTE
Current flows in the motor and the rotor can align itself
Alarm „A078“ appears after the P key is depressed.The converter must
be switched-on within 20 s.

Wait Wait until the converter shuts down!

If fault Ffxx occurs, + Chapter 12 „Fault and alarm messages“

Ready

4.2.2 Parameterization „Expert application“

P050 = Language:
0: Deutsch, 1: English, 2: Espanol, 3: Francais, 4: Italiano

P051 = 3 Access stage „expert mode“

Options- yes Possible option boards: SCB, TSY, CB, TB

boards?

no P052 = 4 Function selection „hardware configuration“

P090 = Define and parameterize the option boards:

P091 = + Instruction Manuals for the option boards
Other parame- Option boards: 0: none
ters depend- 1: CB
ing on the 2: TB
option 3: SCB
4: TSY
Function selection „drive setting“
P052 = 5 If fault „Fxxx“, + Chapter 12 „Fault and alarm messages“

P071 = Converter supply voltage [V] AC units: Line supply voltage

DC units: DC link voltage

P092 = Select output filter: 0: without sinusoidal filter

1: with sinusoidal filter
2: with dv/dt filter

4-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Start-up

Motor rating plate data Observe config. (star/delta)!

1 Motor type: 0: IEC motor (international standard)

P100.i001 =
1: NEMA motor (US standard)
0

P101.x = P101.x = Rated motor voltage [V]

P102.x = P102.x = Rated motor current [A]

(Multi-motor drives: Sum of all the currents)

P103.x = P103.x = No-load current [%]

(Multi-motor drives: Sum of all the no-load currents referred to the sum
of all rated motor currents). For 0.0 %, the value is automatically
calculated for „motor identification at standstill“ and “automatic
parameterization“ (also refer to r196).

P104.x = P105.x = IEC motor: Cos Phi (n)

NEMA motor: Rated output [Hp]
(Multi-motor drives: Sum of all the outputs)

P106.x = Efficiency [%]

P107.x = Rated motor frequency [Hz] The maximum frequency is a function of

P163 „control mode“

P108.x = Rated motor speed [RPM]

P109.x = Motor pole pair number

Motor yes NOTE

protection acc. to
UL spec. The motor temperature is estimated using the motor current.
The motor is reliably protected with the factory setting
no P362 = Motor cooling: 0: naturally ventilated
1: force ventilated
P363 = Motor thermal time constant

P364.i002 = 0 P364.i002 = Motor load limit 1 ... 300 %

P420 = Rated system frequency [Hz]

Motor rated operating frequency in the system

P452.x = Max. frequency, clockwise phase sequence [Hz]

P453.x = Max. frequency, counter-clockwise phase sequence [Hz]

P761 = Pulse frequency (+ Chapter 11 „Parameter list“)

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 4-5

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Start-up 08.96

Sina. filter yes

P092 = 1 or
syn. motor?

no
Function selection „automatic parameterizationl“
P052 = 6
depress P

Wait Wait until the converter is ready to switch on! (PMU display: 009)
If fault „Fxxx“ occurs + Chapter 12 „Fault and alarm messages“

P052 = 7 Function selection „motor identification at standstill“

(includes „ground fault test“ and „automatic parameterization“)
depress P

NOTE
Switch on
Current flows in the motor and the rotor can align itself!
Alarm „A078“ appears after the P key is depressed. The converter must
be switched-on within 20s!

Wait Wait until the converter shuts down!

If fault „Fxxx“ occurs + Chapter 12 „Fault and alarm messages“

Analog-
tacho available? yes
P208 = 3, 4

no Adjust tacho Adjust tacho:

• Tacho at ATI: refer to the ATI Instruction Manual
• Tacho at terminal strip CU:
+ Section 6.3 „Analog inputs“

Change factory setting for:

Change pro- yes Command- and setpoint sources,
cess data connec- Destinations for signals and actual values
tion?

Connect Process data: (+ Chapter 5 „Process data“)

no
process data • Control word (commands)/status word (messages)
• Setpoint/actual values
Possible process data sources/destinations: (Sections 5.1 to 5.3)
• Binary inputs, binary outputs
• Analog inputs, analog outputs
• Serial interface in the basic converter (SST1, SST2)
• Option boards (SCB, TSY, CB, TB)
Simple applications: + Section 4.6

4-6 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Start-up

Possible functions:
Functions yes KIP, WEA, restart-on-the-fly, DC braking, selectivity,
required? Vd-max. controller
(software)

no Parameterize function:
Parameterize Chapter 9 „Functions“
functions and Chapter 11 „Parameter list“

Ready

♦ detailed parameter description: + Chapter 11 „Parameter list“

♦ detailed function diagrams: + Chapter 10 „Function diagrams“

4.3 Drive start-up when the drive converter is controlled through an

external main contactor
It is not absolutely necessary that the converter is operated with a main- or output contactor. If the converter
control functions have to be maintained with the main contactor open, an external 24 V DC power is required.
Binary output 1 (-X9:4,5) is provided to control the contact (pre-assigned P612).
The checkback signal can be wired to a binary input (e.g. binary input 3).

24 V DC Auxiliary voltage Auxiliary voltage

main contactor output contactor

-X1 U1/ V1/ W1/

-K10 L1 L2 L3
-X9:4
-X1 U1/ V1/ W1/ -K11
-X9 -K10 -X9:5
L1 L2 L3 1 2
-K11
-X9:4 -X101:13
-X9:5 -X101:18
for checkback signal
-K10 -X2 U2/ V2/ W2/
-X101:13 T1 T2 T3
-X101:18
for checkback signal
-X2 U2/ V2/ W2/
-K11
T1 T2 T3

M M
3 3

Fig. 4.4 Example for connecting an main- and input contactor Fig. 4.5 Example for connecting an output contactor

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 4-7

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Start-up 08.96

Sequence control, on command-operation (effect on the main- or output contactor).

ON

Contactor available?
(P612) no

yes

Checkback signal
no connected-up?

120 ms delay time yes

Checkback signal?
no 500 ms
F001 yes

Monitor charge curve

DC
link voltage OK.
no after 3 s.

F002 yes
CLOSE bypass contactor
(for AC units in the drive
converter)

20 ms delay time

Ready (011)

Enable
pulses?
no
(P561)

yes
Run (014)

Fig. 4.6 Sequence control, on command- operation

Parameter- Index Parameter- Terminal With Contactor(s) with

No. Name value contactor(s) checkback signals
P612 Dst.MC energized i001 1001 X9: 4,5 X X
P591 Src MC chckbck sig. binary input 3 - 1003 X101:18 X
Table 4.3 Recommended parameterization for the main- and output contactors

4-8 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Start-up

4.4 Drive start-up after enabling additional software functions or

hardware options
If new software functions were enabled in the drive converter or hardware options installed, start-up must be
repeated. This must be realized using the same steps as for first start-up:
• Standard application; + refer to Section 4.2.1
• Expert application: + refer to Section 4.2.2

NOTES
♦ Depending on the required change and taking into account the access stage (P051), and a possibly
necessary function selection (P052), a jump can be made to the appropriate step.

♦ Due to background calculations, it is recommended that the following parameters and functions selections
are checked/executed after the position jumped to!

For example:
Standard application (Section 4.2.1): Changing motor data
♦ P051 = 2 Access stage
♦ P052 = 5 Function selection, „drive setting“
♦ Change motor data
♦ Check subsequent parameters
♦ P052 = 0 Return from function selection
♦ P051 = 1 Access stage

Description of the „function selection“ (P052) and „motor identification at standstill“ (P052 = 7), + Sections 8.1.4
and 8.1.6.

Subsequent enabling of „functions“: + Chapter 9

Subsequent enabling of „hardware options“, Additional information regarding the appropriate options is provided
in the Instruction Manuals.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 4-9

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Start-up 08.96

4.5 Simple application examples for connecting process data with

connection assignment
Connecting-up: + Chapter 1 „Control terminal strip“
Multiple use of control word bits and source connections are permitted.
Caution: This excludes undesirable connections; e.g. factory setting basic/reserve changeover connected at
binary input 5 (P590 = 1005)

4.5.1 Factory setting

Switch-on/off as well as setpoint input via the PMU, messages and actual values via the terminal strip.
Terminal strip only operational if binary input 5 (BE5) is energized (high signal level corresponds to „reserve“).
If BE5 is open (low signal level), then operator control is realized via the PMU.
The factory setting shown is not valid for cabinet units (compare P077)

Controlling via PMU Switch-on/off, Controlling via terminal strip

Basic setting setpoint input Reserve setting

CU1 CU1
-X101/13 P24 -X101/13 P24
-X101/20 BE5 -X101/20 BE5

PMU CU1
-X101/13 P24
P554.1 = 1010 / ------------ON/OFF1 ------------- P554.2 = 1001 -X101/16 BE1
P555.1 = 1 no source ----- OFF2 (pulse inhibit)------- P555.2 = 1002 -X101/17 BE2
P565.1 = 0 only PMU ---------- Aknowledge------------ P565.2 = 1003 -X101/18 BE3
P580.1 = 1 no source -------Fixed setpoint 0/1 -------- P580.2 = 1004 -X101/19 BE4
P573.1 = 1010 -------- Raise mot. pot.---------- P573.2 = 0 no source
P574.1 = 1010 -------- Lower mot. pot. --------- P574.2 = 0 no source

Fig. 4.7 Factory setting: Switsch-on/off as well as setpoint input

Examples of output connections:

Messages and setpoints Parameter values / terminals

CU1
Floating contact----------------------------------- ---------------------- -X100/06 BA2
Fault ------------------------------------------------- P603.1 = 1002 -X100/07 BA2
-X101/13 P24
Basic/reserve-------------------------------------- P590 = 1005 -X101/20 BE5
Speed/frequency-act. value-------------------- P655.1 = 0218 -X102/33 AA1M
-X102/34 AA1

Fig. 4.8 Factory setting: Messages and setpoints

4-10 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Start-up

4.5.2 Manual/automatic operation (Basic/reserve changeover)

Manual operation (BE5 low signal level): Setpoint- and command input via the terminal strip.

Automatic operation (BE5 high signal level): Setpoint-and command input from the automation unt via serial
interface (SST1), OFF3 and the monitoring of external faults via a
terminal strip also possible.
Recommended parameterization:

Manual operation, Setpoint- and command Automatic operation

Controlling via terminal strip input

CU1 CU1
-X101/13 P24 -X101/13 P24
-X101/20 BE5 -X101/20 BE5

SST2
-X101/13 P24
P554.1 = 1001 -X101/16 BE1 ------------ON/OFF1 -------------P554.2 = 2001 SST2 control word
P558.1 = 1002 -X101/17 BE2 ------- OFF3 (fast stop)---------P559.2 = 2001
P565.1 = 1003 -X101/18 BE3 ---------- Aknowledge------------P565.2 = 2001
P575.1 = 1004 -X101/19 BE4 -------- Fault external 1 ---------
---------cw phase seq. ----------P571.2 = 2001
-------- ccw phase seq. ---------P572.2 = 2001
P443.1 = 1003 -X102/27 AE1 --------- Main setpoint -----------P443.2 = 2002 SST2 word 2
-X102/28 AE1M

Fig. 4.9 Manual / automatic: switsch-on/off as well as setpoint input

Examples of output connections:

Messages and setpoints Parameter values / terminals

CU1
Floating contact----------------------------------- ----------------------- -X100/06 BA2
Operation------------------------------------------- P602.1 = 1002 -X100/07 BA2
-X101/13 P24
Basic/reserve-------------------------------------- P590 = 1005 -X101/20 BE5
Output current------------------------------------- P655.1 = 0004 -X102/33 AA1M
-X102/34 AA1

Fig. 4.10 Manual / automatic: Messages and setpoints

Tip: If a terminal cannot be connected-up as source or destination, it should be checked as to whether it has
already been used for other signals.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 4-11

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Process data

5 Process data

5.1 Control word (control word 1 and control word 2)

Introduction and application example

An individual source can be parameterized for every control command, from where the control command may
be output (fixed values, binary inputs, PMU, PZD part of the telegram from the automation devices).
The selection parameters for the sources are, with the exception of P590 and P591 are indexed 2x as follows:
Index i001: Basic setting (GRD)
Index i002: Reserve setting (RES)
One parameter is available to „connect-up“ the source(s) for the control commands.

Example for connecting-up the sources:

The basic setting for the ON command (control word bit 0, control word 1), should be „connected-up“ to binary
input 1 of the CU (terminal -X101:16):
♦ From control word 1 table, one can identify that the factory setting of parameter P554.1 is 1010 for the basic
setting of the ON command source.
♦ In Table A for the possible sources of the ON-command, one can see that 1010 corresponds to the „PMU
operator control panel“ source.
♦ The parameter value for the required source is searched for in Tables X and A. For binary input 1 (BE1) of
the CU, the result is found in table X, it is 1001.
♦ This parameter value must now be entered into parameter P554.1.

Command Parameter Possible sources Parameter value Required source connection

ON/OFF1 (GRD) P554.1 Tab. X,A 1001 BE1 terminal -X101:16

A high signal at terminal -X101:16 powers-up the drive converter; a low signal powers-down the drive converter.

INFORMATION
♦ Multiple wiring is permitted!
♦ The control word commands „OFF2“ (bit 1), „OFF3“ (bit 2) and „acknowledge“ (bit 7) are always
simultaneously effective from 3 sources (can be parameterized)!
♦ „Acknowledge“ (bit7) is additionally always effective from the PMU!
♦ If the „on“ command (bit 0) is connected to a serial interface (SST, CB/TB, SCB-SST), then the following
must be observed for safety-related reasons:
Additionally, an „OFF2“ or „OFF3“ command must be parameterized at the terminal strip/PMU, as
otherwise the converter cannot be shutdown with a a defined command, when communications fail!

5.1.1 Control word display using the 7-segment display on the PMU

15 13 11 9 15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8 14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0

Control word 1 Control word 2

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 5-1

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Process data 08.96

5.1.2 Control word 1 (Visualization parameter r550 or r967)

The factory setting is only valid for P077 = 0.

Designation Value High / Low Parameter No. Fact. setting. Source

Bit No. (1 = High, 0 = Low) BAS (RES) BAS (RES) selection
(Significance) (P077 = 0) see 5.1.4
ON / OFF1 (Stop) ON OFF1
0 1 0 P554.1 (2) 1010 (1001) Tab. X,A
OFF2 (electrical) ON OFF2
P555.1 (2) 0001 (1002) Tab. X,B
1 1 0
& P556.1 (2)
P557.1 (2)
0001 (0001)
0001 (0001)
Tab. X,B
Tab. X,B
OFF3 (fast stop) ON OFF3
P558.1 (2) 0001 (0001) Tab. X,B
2 1 0
& P559.1 (2)
P560.1 (2)
0001 (0001)
0001 (0001)
Tab. X,B
Tab. X,B
Inverter enable Inverter enable Inhibit inverter
3 1 0 P561.1 (2) 0001 (0001) Tab. X,F
RFG enable RFG enable Inhibit RFG
4 1 0 P562.1 (2) 0001 (0001) Tab. X,F
Start RFG Start RFG RFG stop
5 1 0 P563.1 (2) 0001 (0001) Tab. X,F
Setpoint enable Setpoint enable Inhibit setpoint
6 1 0 P564.1 (2) 0001 (0001) Tab. X,F
Acknowledge ON
P565.1 (2) 0000 (1003) Tab. X,C
7 1 P566.1 (2) 0000 (0000) Tab. X,C
0 P567.1 (2) 2001 (2001) Tab. X,C
1010 (fixed)
Inching 1 Inching 1 ON Inching 1 OFF
8 1 0 P568.1 (2) 0000 (0000) Tab. X,C
9 Reserve
Control from the PLC Control no control
SST1/2
10 1 0 ≥1 CB / TB
SCB 2
Enable ph. seq. Both enab. ccw ph seq cw ph. seq No ph seq

11 1 0 1 0 P571.1 (2) 0001 (0001) Tab. X,E

12 1 1 0 0 P572.1 (2) 0001 (0001) Tab. X,E
Motor potentiometer Stop Raise Lower Stop
13 0 1 0 1 P573.1 (2) 1010 (0000) Tab. X,A
14 0 0 1 1 P574.1 (2) 1010 (0000) Tab. X,A
Fault, external 1 no fault Fault, external 1
15 1 0 P575.1 (2) 0001 (0001) Tab. X,D

5-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Process data

5.1.3 Control word 2 (Visualization parameter r551)

The factory setting is only valid for P077 = 0

Designation Value High / Low Parameter No. Fact. setting. Source

Bit No. (1 = High, 0 = Low) BAS (RES) BAS (RES) selection
(Significance) (P077 = 0) see 5.1.4
Setpoint data set SDS 2 SDS 1
16 1 0 P576.1 (2) 0000 (0000) Tab. X,I
17 Reserve
Motor data set MDS 2 MDS 1
18 1 0 P578.1 (2) 0000 (0000) Tab. X,I
19 Reserve
Fixed setpoint FS 4 FS 3 FS 2 FS 1
20 1 0 1 0 P580.1 (2) 0000 (1004) Tab. X,I
21 1 1 0 0 P581.1 (2) 0000 (0000) Tab. X,I
22 Reserve
Restart-on-the-fly Enable Inhibit
23 1 0 P583.1 (2) 0000 (0000) Tab. X,I
Technology controller Enable Inhibit
24 1 0 P584.1 (2) 0000 (0000) Tab. X,I
25 Reserve
Fault, external 2 No fault Fault, external 2
26 1 0 P586.1 (2) 0001 (0001) Tab. X,G
27 Reserve
Alarm, external 1 No alarm Alarm, external 1
28 1 0 P588.1 (2) 0001 (0001) Tab. X,G
Alarm, external 2 No alarm Alarm, external 2
29 1 0 P589.1 (2) 0001 (0001) Tab. X,G
Basic/reserve Reserve setting Basic setting
30 1 0 P590 1005 Tab. X,I
HS checkback sig. HS checkback sig. No HS checkb. sig.
31 1 0 P591 0001 Tab. X,H

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 5-3

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Process data 08.96

5.1.4 Selecting the source for control words 1 and 2

Table X (external pins) Table A

1001 BE1 Pin -X101:16 0000 constant value 0
1002 BE2 Pin -X101:17 1010 PMU
1003 BE3 Pin -X101:18 2001 SST1 word 1
1004 BE4 Pin -X101:19 3001 CB/TB word 1
1005 BE5 Pin -X101:20 4501 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 1
4101 SCI, Slave1, Pin 01 4502 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
4102 SCI, Slave1, Pin 02 4503 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
4103 SCI, Slave1, Pin 03 4504 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
4104 SCI, Slave1, Pin 04 4505 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
4105 SCI, Slave1, Pin 05
4106 SCI, Slave1, Pin 06 Table B
4107 SCI, Slave1, Pin 07 0001 constant value 1
4108 SCI, Slave1, Pin 08 1010 PMU
4109 SCI, Slave1, Pin 09 2001 SST1 word 1
4110 SCI, Slave1, Pin 10 3001 CB/TB word 1
4111 SCI, Slave1, Pin 11 4501 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 1
4112 SCI, Slave1, Pin 12 4502 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
4113 SCI, Slave1, Pin 13 4503 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
4114 SCI, Slave1, Pin 14 4504 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
4115 SCI, Slave1, Pin 15 4505 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
4116 SCI, Slave1, Pin 16
4201 SCI, Slave2, Pin 01 Table C
4202 SCI, Slave2, Pin 02
0000 constant value 0
4203 SCI, Slave2, Pin 03
2001 SST1 word 1
4204 SCI, Slave2, Pin 04
3001 CB/TB word 1
4205 SCI, Slave2, Pin 05
4501 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 1
4206 SCI, Slave2, Pin 06
4502 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
4207 SCI, Slave2, Pin 07
4503 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
4208 SCI, Slave2, Pin 08
4504 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
4209 SCI, Slave2, Pin 09
4505 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
4210 SCI, Slave2, Pin 10
4211 SCI, Slave2, Pin 11 Table D
4212 SCI, Slave2, Pin 12
0001 constant value 1
4213 SCI, Slave2, Pin 13
2001 SST1 word 1
4214 SCI, Slave2, Pin 14
3001 CB/TB word 1
4215 SCI, Slave2, Pin 15
4501 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 1
4216 SCI, Slave2, Pin 16
4502 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
5001 TSY, Pin 1
4503 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
4504 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
4505 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5

5-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Process data

Table E Table I
0000 constant value 0 0000 constant value 0
0001 constant value 1 0001 constant value 1
1010 PMU 2004 SST1 word 4
2001 SST1 word 1 3004 CB/TB word 4
3001 CB/TB word 1 4501 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 1
4501 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 1 4502 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
4502 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2 4503 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
4503 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3 4504 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 4
4504 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4 4505 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5
4505 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5

Table F
0000 constant value 0
0001 constant value 1
2001 SST1 word 1
3001 CB/TB word 1
4501 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 1
4502 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
4503 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
4504 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
4505 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5

Table G
0001 constant value 1
2004 SST1 word 4
3004 CB/TB word 4
4501 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 1
4502 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
4503 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
4504 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, SCB2 USS, word 4
4505 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5

Table H
0001 No HS checkback sig.
4501 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 1
4502 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 2
4503 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 3
4504 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 4
4505 SCB1/2 peer-to-peer, word 5

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 5-5

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Process data 08.96

5.1.5 Significance of control word- (1 and 2) commands

The operating statuses can be read in monitoring parameter r001: e.g. READY-TO-POWER-UP: r001=009.

The function sequences are described in the sequence in which they are realized.

Bit 0: ON / OFF1 command (↑ „ON“) / (L „OFF1“)

The command is executed with a positive edge change from L to H (L → H) only in the READY-TO-SWITCH-
ON (009).
Folge: ♦ PRE-CHARGING (010)
Main contactor/bypass contactor (option) are switched-in, if present
Pre-charging is realized
♦ READY STATUS (011)
If the unit was last powered don using „OFF2“, the drive converter only changes over into the next
status after the de-energization time (P371) since the last shutdown instant.
♦ GROUND FAULT TEST (012), only for selected ground-fault test (P354).
♦ RESTART-ON-THE-FLY (013), if restart-on-the-fly (control word bit 23 via P583) is enabled.
♦ READY (014).

LOW-Signal
Result: ♦ OFF1 (015), if the unit is in a status with inverter enable.
The setpoint is inhibited at the ramp-function generator input (setpoint=0), so that the drive is
decelerated along the parameterized deceleration ramp (P464) down to the OFF shutdown
frequency (P514).
After the OFF delay time has expired (P516), the inverter pulses are inhibited, and the main
contactor, if available, is opened. If the OFF1 command is again withdrawn during ramp-down (e.g.
using an ON command), deceleration is interrupted, and the drive goes into the „RUN (014) status.
♦ The inverter pulses are inhibited, and the main contactor, if available, opened for PRECHARGING
(010), READY (011), RESTART-ON-THE-FLY (013) or MOT-ID STANDSTILL (018).
♦ SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008)
♦ SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (009), if „OFF2“ or „OFF3“ is not present.

Bit 1: OFF2 command (L „OFF2“) (electrical)

LOW signal
Result: ♦ The inverter pulses are inhibited, and the main contact, if available, opened.
♦ SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008), until the command is withdrawn.

NOTE
The OFF2 command is simultaneously effective from three sources (P555, P556 and P557)!

5-6 Siemens AG 6SE7080-0XX20

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Betriebsanleitung
08.96 Process data

Bit 2: OFF3 command (L „OFF3“) (fast stop)

LOW signal

Result: ♦ This command has two possible effects:

• DC braking is enabled (P372 = 1):
DC braking (017)
The drive decelerates along the parameterized down ramp for OFF3 (P466), until it reaches the
start of DC braking frequency (P375).
The inverter pulses are then inhibited for the duration of the de-energization time (P371).
DC current braking is then realized with an adjustable braking current (P373) with a braking
time which can be parameterized (P374).
The inverter pulses are then inhibited, and the main contactor, if available, is opened.
• DC braking is not enabled (P372 = 0):
The setpoint is inhibited at the ramp-function generator input (setpoint = 0), so that the drive
decelerates along the parameterized downramp for OFF3 (P466) to the OFF shutdown
frequency (P514).
After the OFF delay time (P516) has expired, the inverter pulses are inhibited, and the
main/bypass contactor, if available, is opened.
If the OFF 3 command is again withdrawn during deceleration, the drive still continues to
decelerate.
+ Section 6.6 „Ramp-function generator“
♦ The inverter pulses are inhibited, and the main/bypass contactor, if available, is opened for
PRECHARGING (010), READY (011), RESTART-ON-THE-FLY (013) or MOT-ID STANDSTILL
(018).
♦ If the drive operates as slave drive, then it automatically switches-over to master drive, for an
OFF3 command.
♦ SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008), until the command is withdrawn.

NOTE
♦ The OFF 3 command is simultaneously effective from three sources (P558, P559 und P560)!
♦ Priority of the OFF commands: OFF2 > OFF3 > OFF1

Bit 3: Inverter enable command (H „inverter enable“) / (L „inverter inhibit“)

HIGH signal, READY (011) and expiration of the de-energization time (P371) since the last shutdown instant.
Result: ♦ RUN (014)
The inverter pulses are enabled, and the setpoint is approached via the ramp-function generator.

LOW signal
Result: ♦ For RESTART-ON-THE-FLY (013), RUN (014) or KINETIC BUFFERING with pulse enable:
Changeover into the READY (011) status, the inverter pulses are inhibited.
♦ For OFF1 (015 / stop), the inverter pulses are inhibited, the main contact, if available, opens, and
the drive converter changes over into the SWITCH-ON INHIBIT status (008).
♦ For OFF3 (016 / fast stop), the inverter inhibit command is ignored, and fast stop is continued.

Siemens AG 6SE7080-0XX20 5-7

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Betriebsanleitung
Process data 08.96

Bit 4: Ramp-function generator inhibit command (L „inhibit ramp-function generator“)

LOW signal in the RUN (014) status.
Result: ♦ The ramp-function generator output is set to setpoint = 0.

Bit 5: Ramp-function generator stop command (L „ramp-function generator stop“)

LOW signal in the RUN status (014).
Result: ♦ The actual setpoint is frozen at the ramp-function generator output.

Bit 6: Setpoint enable command ( H „setpoint enable“)

HIGH signal and expiration of the de-energization time (P189).
Result: ♦ The setpoint at the ramp-function generator input is enabled.

Bit 7: Acknowledge command (↑ „Acknowledge“)

Positive edge change from (L → H) in the FAULT status (007).
Result: ♦ All of the actual faults are deleted after they have been previously transferred into the diagnostics
memory.
♦ SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008), if no actual faults exist.
♦ FAULT (007), if additional actual faults exist.

NOTE
The acknowledge command is simultaneously effective from three sources (P565, P566 und P567) and
alwlays from the PMU!

Bit 8: Inching 1 ON command (↑ „Inching 1 ON“) / (L „Inching 1 OFF“)

Positive edge change from L to H (L → H) in the READY TO SWITCH-ON status (009).
Result: ♦ An ON command (refer to control word, bit 0) is issued, and the inching frequency 1 (P448) is
enabled in the setpoint channel.
The ON/OFF1 command (bit 0) is ignored for active inching operation.

LOW signal
Result: ♦ An OFF1 command (refer to control word bit 0) is automatically issued.

Bit 9: Reserved

5-8 Siemens AG 6SE7080-0XX20

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Betriebsanleitung
08.96 Process data

Bit 10: Control from the PLC command (H „control from the PLC“)
HIGH signal; Process data PZD (control word, setpoints) which were sent via the SST1 interface of CU, the
CB/TB interface (option) and the SST/SCB interface (option), are only evaluated if the command
was accepted.
Result: ♦ If several interfaces are operational, only the process data of the interfaces are evaluated, which
transmit the H signal.
♦ For an L signal, the last values are retained in the appropriate dual port RAM of the interface.

NOTE
An H signal appears in the visualization parameter r550 „control word 1“, if one of the interfaces transmits
an H signal!

Bit 11: Clockwise phase sequence command (H „clockwise phase sequence“)

HIGH signal
Result: ♦ The setpoint is influenced in conjunction with bit 12 „counter-clockwise rotating field“.
+ Chapter 10 „Function diagram, setpoint channel CU (Section 2)“

Bit 12: Counter-clockwise phase sequence command (H „counter-clockwise phase sequence“)

HIGH signal
Result: ♦ The setpoint is influenced in conjunction with bit 11 „clockwise rotating field“.
+ Chapter 10 „Function diagram, setpoint channel CU (Section 2)“

NOTE
The counter-clockwise phase sequence- and clockwise phase sequence commands have no influence on
the supplementary setpoint, if this is added after the ramp-function generator via P432=0 (factory setting 1)!

Bit 13: Motorized potentiomenter, raise command (H „raise motorized potentiometer“)

HIGH signal
Result: ♦ The motorized potentiometer in the setpoint channel is energized in conjunction with bit 14
„motorized potentiometer, lower“.
+ Chapter 10 „Function diagram, setpoint channel CU (Section 1)“

Bit 14: Motorized potentiometer, lower command (H „motorized potentiometer, lower)

HIGH signal
Result: ♦ The motorized potentiometer in the setpoint channel is energized in conjunction with bit 13
„motorized potentiometer, raise“.
+ Chapter 10 „Function diagram, setpoint channel CU (Section 1)“

Siemens AG 6SE7080-0XX20 5-9

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Betriebsanleitung
Process data 08.96

Bit 15: Fault, external 1 command (L „fault, external 1“)

LOW signal
Result: ♦ FAULT (007) and fault message (F035).
The inverter pulses are inhibited and the main contactor, if available, is opened.
+ Chapter 12 „Fault and alarm messages“

Bit 16: Setpoint channel data set SDS bit 0 command (H „SDS2“) / (L „SDS1“)
HIGH signal activates SDS2, LOW signal, SDS1.
Result: ♦ The parameter settings of the appropriate data set are activated in the setpoint channel.
+ Chapter 10 „Function diagram, setpoint channel CU (Part 1) / data sets“

Bit 17: Reserved

Bit 18: Motor data set MDS bit 0 command (H „MDS2“) / (L „MDS1“)
READY-TO-SWITCH-ON (009), PRECHARGING (010) or READY (011)
HIGH signal activates MDS2, LOW signal, MDS1.
Result: ♦ The parameter settings of the appropriate motor data set in the setpoint channel and in the open-
loop/closed-loop control are activated.
+ Chapter 10 „Function diagram, data sets“

Bit 19: Reserved

Bit 20: Fixed setpoint FSW bit 0 (LSB command)

Result: ♦ One of the four possible fixed setpoints is controlled in conjunction with bit 21 „FSW BIT 1“.
+ Chapter 10 „Function diagram, setpoint channel CU (Section 1) / data sets“

Bit 21: Fixed setpoint FSW bit 1 (MSB) command

Result: ♦ One of the four possible fixed setpoints is controlled in conjunction with bit 20 „FSW BIT 0“.
+ Chapter 10 „Function diagram, setpoint channel CU (Section 1) / data sets“

Bit 22: Reserved

Bit 23: Restart-on-the-fly enable command (H „enable restart-on-the-fly“)

HIGH-Signal
Folge: ♦ This command enables the restart-on-the-fly function.
+ Chapter 9 „Functions (software)"

5-10 Siemens AG 6SE7080-0XX20

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Betriebsanleitung
08.96 Process data

Bit 24: Technology controller enable command (H „technology controller enable“)

HIGH-Signal
Folge: ♦ The command activates the technology controller if the inverter pulses are enabled and the
excitation time has expired. The technology controller can be parameterized using parameters
P525 to P545.
+ Chapter 10 „Function diagrams, closed-loop control“ and Chapter 11 „Parameter list“

Bit 25: Reserved

Bit 26: Fault, external 2 command (L „fault, external 2“)

LOW signal; only activated from the READY status (011) with an additional time delay of 200 ms.
Result: ♦ FAULT (007) and fault message (F036).
The inverter pulses are inhibited, the main contactor, if available, is opened.
+ Chapter 12 „Fault and alarm messages“

Bit 27: Reserved

Bit 28: Alarm, external 1 command (L „alarm, external 1“)

LOW signal
Result: ♦ The operating status is retained. An alarm message (A015) is output.
+ Chapter 12 „Fault and alarm messages“

Bit 29: Alarm, external 2 command (L „alarm, external 2“)

LOW-Signal
Result: ♦ The operating status is retained. An alarm message (A016) is output.
+ Chapter 12 „Fault and alarm messages“

Bit 30: Selection, reserve/basic setting command (H „reserve setting“) / (L „basic setting“)
HIGH signal
Folge: ♦ The parameter settings of the reserve setting for the control word itself, the setpoint channel, and
the closed-loop control are activated.

LOW signal
Result: ♦ The parameter settings of the basic setting for the control word itself, the setpoint channel, and the
closed-loop control are activated.
+ Chapter 10 „Function diagrams, data sets“

Bit 31: HS checkback signal command (H „HS checkback signal“)

HIGH signal, corresponding to the configuration (wiring) and parameterization of the main contactor (option).
Result: ♦ Checkback signal, „main contactor energized“.
+ Chapter „Options“ in Operating Instructions, Part 1

Siemens AG 6SE7080-0XX20 5-11

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Betriebsanleitung
Process data 08.96

5.2 Status word

Introduction and application example

Status words are process data in the sense of the explanation in Section 3.2.

A „destination“ can be parameterized for every bit of a status word, which can be identified by the bit status
(binary outputs of the CU, SCI 1/2 terminals, TSY terminals).

A parameter is available to „connect-up“ the destination for each status bit.

The selection parameters are indexed three times as follows:

Index i001 Selecting a terminal on the CU / PEU board (basic drive converter)
Index i002 Selecting a terminal on the SCI 1/2 board (option)
Index i003 Selecting a terminal on the TSY board (option)

Example for connecting-up the destination:

The „ramp-function generator active“ signal (status word 1, bit 13), is to be connected-up as high-active signal
at binary output 2 (BA2) of CU (terminal -X100:6/7) :
♦ The status bit „connection“ to binary output of the CU is parameterized via index i001.
♦ From the status word 1 table, it can be identified that the „ramp-function generator active“ signal is assigned
to parameter P613.
♦ The parameter value for the required destination is searched for in the same table. The result is 1002 for
binary output 2 of the CU.
♦ This parameter value must now be entered into parameter P613.1.

Bit # Significance Parameter Parameter value Required destination connection

Bit 13 Ramp-function P613.1 1002 BA2 terminal -X100:6/7
generator active

For a high signal at terminal -X100:6/7, the ramp-function generator is active; it is inactive for a low signal.

If a value, which is assigned a terminal (binary output BA), is assigned once in a select parameter for a
destination, then it is no longer available in the same index of another select parameter, as a terminal is only
suitable to output one status bit.

INFORMATION
Faults, alarms and power-on inhibit (HIGH active), are displayed via the terminal strip (binary outputs) as
LOW active.
This is also valid for possible option boards!
+ Section 6.2 „Binary outputs“

5-12 Siemens AG 6SE7080-0XX20

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Betriebsanleitung
08.96 Process data

5.2.1 Status word 1 (visualization parameter r552 or r968)

PMU display 15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
„Status word 1“ 7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0

Bit # Value 1 = High Select Value Destination

0 = Low dest.
Bit 0 1 Ready-to-switch-on P600.x
0 Not ready to switch on x=1 0000 No destination
Bit 1 1 Ready P601.x 1001 BA1, -X9:4/5
0 Not ready 1002 BA2, -X100:6/7/8
Bit 2 1 Run P602.x
0 Inverter pulses inhibited 0000 No destination
Bit 3 1 Fault P603.x 4101 SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA1
0 No fault 4102 SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA2
Bit 4 1 No OFF 2 P604.x 4103 SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA3
0 OFF2 4104 SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA4
Bit 5 1 No OFF 3 P605.x 4105 SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA5
0 OFF3 4106 SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA6
Bit 6 1 Switch-on inhibit P606.x 4107 SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA7
0 No switch-on inhibit 4108 SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA8
Bit 7 1 Alarm P607.x 4109 only SCI 2, slave 1, BA9
0 No alarm 4110 only SCI 2, slave 1, BA10
Bit 8 1 No setpt. act. val. deviation P608.x x=2 4111 only SCI 2, slave 1, BA11
0 Setpt. act. value deviation 4112 only SCI 2, slave 1, BA12
Bit 9 1 PZD control requested always 1 4201 SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA1
0 (not permissible) 4202 SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA2
Bit 10 1 Comparison freq. reached P610.x 4203 SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA3
0 Actual val. < comparitive freq. 4204 SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA4
Bit 11 1 Fault, undervoltage P611.x 4205 SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA5
0 No undervoltage fault 4206 SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA6
Bit 12 1 Main contactor energized P612.x 4207 SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA7
0 Main contactor not energized 4208 SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA8
Bit 13 1 HLG active P613.x 4209 only SCI 2, slave 2, BA9
0 HLG not active 4210 only SCI 2, slave 2, BA10
Bit 14 1 Clockwise phase sequence P614.x 4211 only SCI 2, slave 2, BA11
0 Counter-clockwise phase seq. 4212 only SCI 2, slave 2, BA12
Bit 15 KIP/FLN active P615.x
0 KIP/FLN not active x=3 0000 No destination
5001 TSY, BA1
5002 TSY, BA2

Siemens AG 6SE7080-0XX20 5-13

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Betriebsanleitung
Process data 08.96

5.2.2 Status word 2 (visualization parameter r553)

PMU display 31 29 27 25
30 28 26 24
„Status word 2“ 23 21 19 17
22 20 18 16

Bit # Value 1 = High Select Value Destination

0 = Low dest.
Bit 16 1 Restart on the fly active P616.x
0 Restart-on-the-fly not active x=1 0000 No destination
Bit 17 Reserved 1001 BA1, -X9:4/5
Bit 18 1 No overspeed P618.x 1002 BA2, -X100:6/7/8
0 Overspeed
Bit 19 1 Fault, external 1 P619.x 0000 No destination
0 No fault, external 1 4101 SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA1
Bit 20 1 Fault, external 2 P620.x 4102 SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA2
0 No fault, external 2 4103 SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA3
Bit 21 1 Alarm, external P621.x 4104 SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA4
0 No alarm, external 4105 SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA5
Bit 22 1 Alarm i2t converter P622.x 4106 SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA6
0 No alarm, i2t converter 4107 SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA7
Bit 23 1 Fault, overtemp., converter P623.x 4108 SCI 1/2, slave 1, BA8
0 No fault, overtemp. conv. 4109 only SCI 2, slave 1, BA9
Bit 24 1 Alarm, overtemp., conv. P624.x x=2 4110 only SCI 2, slave 1, BA10
0 No alarm, overtemp., conv. 4111 only SCI 2, slave 1, BA11
Bit 25 1 Alarm, motor overtemp. P625.x 4112 only SCI 2, slave 1, BA12
0 No alarm, overtemp. mot. 4201 SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA1
Bit 26 1 Fault, motor overtemp. P626.x 4202 SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA2
0 No fault, overtemp. mot. 4203 SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA3
Bit 27 1 T. contr. act. val.>T. contr. setp. P627.x 4204 SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA4
0 T. contr. act. val.<T. contr. setp. 4205 SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA5
Bit 28 1 Fault, motor stall/lock P628.x 4206 SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA6
0 No fault motor stall/lock 4207 SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA7
Bit 29 1 Bypass contactor energized P629.x 4208 SCI 1/2, slave 2, BA8
0 Bypass contactor not energized 4209 only SCI 2, slave 2, BA9
Bit 30 Reserved 4210 only SCI 2, slave 2, BA10
Bit 31 1 Pre-charging active P631.x 4211 only SCI 2, slave 2, BA11
0 Pre-charging not active 4212 only SCI 2, slave 2, BA12

x=3 0000 No destination

5001 TSY, BA1
5002 TSY, BA2

5-14 Siemens AG 6SE7080-0XX20

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Betriebsanleitung
08.96 Process data

5.2.3 Significance of the status word messages

Bit 0: Signal, „Ready to switch-on“ (H)

HIGH signal: SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) or READY-TO-SWITCH-ON (009) status
Significance ♦ The power supply, the open-loop and closed-loop control are operational.
♦ The inverter impulses are inhibited.
♦ If an external power supply and a main contactor (option) are available, it is possible that the
DC link can be brought into a no-voltage condition in this converter status!

Bit 1: Signal, „ready“ (H)

HIGH signal: PRE-CHARGING (010) or READY (011) status
Significance ♦ The power supply, the open-loop and closed-loop control are operational.
♦ The converter is switched-on.
♦ Pre-charging is executed (has been completed).
♦ The DC link is ramped-up to the full voltage (has attained full voltage).
♦ The inverter pulses are still inhibited.

Bit 2: Signal, „run“ (H)

HIGH signal: RESTART-ON-THE-FLY (013), RUN (014), OFF1 (015) or OFF3 (016) status

Significance ♦ The converter is functioning.

♦ The inverter pulses are enabled.
♦ The output terminals are live.

Bit 3: Signal, „Fault“ (H)

HIGH signal: FAULT (007) status
Significance ♦ A fault has occured.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CU, TSY, SCI1/2) with L signal.

Bit 4: Signal, „OFF2“ (L)

LOW signal: OFF2 command present
Significance ♦ The OFF2 command (control word bit 1) was output.

Bit 5: Signal, „OFF3“ (L)

LOW signal : OFF3 (016) status, and/or OFF3 command available
Significance ♦ The OFF3 command (control word bit 2) was output.

Siemens AG 6SE7080-0XX20 5-15

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Betriebsanleitung
Process data 08.96

Bit 6: Signal, „switch-on inhibit“ (H)

HIGH signal: SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) status
Significance ♦ The power supply, open- and closed-loop control are operational.
♦ If an external power supply and a main contactor (option) are available, it is possible that the
DC link is in a no-voltage condition in this converter status!
♦ The message is continuously available as long as an OFF2 command is present via the control
word bit1; or/and an OFF3 command is available via the control word bit 2 after the setpoint has
been reduced; or/and an ON command is still available via the control word bit 0 (edge
evaluation).
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CU, TSY, SCI1/2) with L signal.

Bit 7: Signal, „alarm“ (H)

HIGH signal: Alarm (Axxx)
Significance ♦ An alarm has occured.
♦ The signal remains until the cause has been removed.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CU, TSY, SCI1/2) with L signal.

Bit 8: Signal, „setpoint-actual value deviation“ (L)

LOW signal: Alarm „setpoint-actual value deviation“ (A034)
Significance ♦ The frequency actual value - frequency setpoint deviation is greater than P517 (Deviation Freq.)
and remains for longer than the time parameterized in P518 (Deviation Time).
♦ The bit is again set to an H signal if the deviation is less than the parameter value P517.

Bit 9: Signal, „PZD control requested“ (H)

HIGH signal: It is always present.

Bit 10: Signal, „comparison frequency reached“ (H)

HIGH signal: The parameterized comparison frequency has been reached.
Significance ♦ The absolute frequency actual value is greater than or the same as the parameterized
comparison frequency (P512).
♦ The bit is again set to L, as soon as the actual absolute frequency value falls below the
comparison frequency (P512), minus the parameterized comparison frequency hysteresis
(P513 in % referred to the comparison frequency (P512)).

Bit 11: Signal, „fault, undervoltage“ (H)

HIGH signal: Fault „undervoltage in the DC link“ (F008)
Significance ♦ The DC link voltage has fallen below the permissible limit value.
+ Chapter 12 „Fault and alarm messages“
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CU, TSY, SCI1/2) with L signal.

5-16 Siemens AG 6SE7080-0XX20

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Betriebsanleitung
08.96 Process data

Bit 12: Signal, „main contactor energized“ (H)

HIGH signal: The main contactor is energized.
Significance ♦ A main contactor (option) can be controlled with the appropriate „wiring“ and parameterization.
+ Chapter „Options“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 1

Bit 13: Signal, „RFG active“ (H)

HIGH signal: Ramp-function generator active
Significance ♦ The ramp-function generator output value (r480) is not equal to the ramp-function input value
(r460).
A hysteresis, which can be parameterized, (P476 in %, referred to the rated system frequency
P420) can only be taken into account for an analog setpoint input.

Bit 14: Signal, „clockwise phase sequence“ (H)/“ counter-clockwise phase sequence“ (L)
HIGH signal: Clockwise phase sequence
Significance ♦ The frequency setpoint for the closed-loop control (n/f setpoint, r482), is greater than or equal to
0).
LOW signal: Counter-clockwise phase sequence
Significance ♦ The frequency setpoint for the closed-loop control (n/f setpoint, r482) is less than 0.

Bit 15: Signal, „KIP/FLN active“ (H)

HIGH signal: The kinetic buffering (KIP) function or the flexible response (FLN) function is active.
Significance ♦ KIP: A brief supply failure is buffered using the kinetic energy of the machine.
♦ FLN: The drive converter can be operated down to a minimum DC link voltage of 50% of the
rated value.
+ Chapter „Functions“

Bit 16: Signal, „restart-on-the-fly active“ (H)

HIGH signal: The restart-on-the-fly function is active or the excitation time (P189) is running.
Significance ♦ The drive converter has been switched to a motor which is still rotating.
♦ An overcurrent condition is prevented using the restart-on-the-fly function.
+ Chapter 9 „Functions“
♦ The energization time is active.

Bit 17: Reserved

Siemens AG 6SE7080-0XX20 5-17

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Betriebsanleitung
Process data 08.96

Bit 18: Signal, „overspeed“ (L)

LOW signal: Alarm „overspeed“ (A033)
Significance ♦ The frequency actual value is either:
• greater than the maximum frequency for a clockwise phase sequence (P452), plus a
hysteresis (P519 in %, referred to P452) or
• is less than the maximum frequency for the counter-clockwise phase sequence (P453) plus
a hysteresis (P519 in %, referred to P453).
♦ The bit is again set to an H, as soon as the absolute frequency actual value is less than or
equal to the absolute value of the appropriate maximum frequency.

Bit 19: Signal, „fault, external 1“ (H)

HIGH signal: „Fault, external 1“
Significance ♦ A „fault, external 1“ is present in control word bit 15.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CU, TSY, SCI1/2) with L signal.

Bit 20: Signal, „fault, external 2“ (H)

HIGH signal: „Fault, external 2“
Significance ♦ A „fault, external 2“ is present in control word bit 26.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CU, TSY, SCI1/2) with L signal.

Bit 21: Signal, „external alarm“ (H)

HIGH signal: „External alarm“
Significance ♦ An „external alarm 1“ is present in control word bit 28, or an „external alarm 2“ in control word
bit 29.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CU, TSY, SCI1/2) with L signal.

Bit 22: Signal, „alarm i2t inv.“ (H)

HIGH signal: Alarm „i2t-Inv.“ (A025)
Significance ♦ If the instantaneous load status remains the same, then the drive converter will be thermally
overloaded.
+ Chapter 12 „Fault and alarm messages“
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CU, TSY, SCI1/2) with L signal.

Bit 23: Signal, „Overtemperature fault signal UMR“ (H)

HIGH signal: „Inverter temperature too high“ fault (F023)
Significance ♦ The inverter temperature limit value was exceeded.
+ Chapter 12 „Fault and alarm messages“
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CU, TSY, SCI1/2) with L signal.

Bit 24: Signal, „motor overtemperature alarm“ (H)

HIGH signal: Alarm „inverter temperature too high“ (A022)
Significance ♦ Alarm temperature threshold of the inverter was exceeded.
+ Chapter 12 „Fault and alarm messages“
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CU, TSY, SCI1/2) with L signal.

5-18 Siemens AG 6SE7080-0XX20

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Betriebsanleitung
08.96 Process data

Bit 25: Signal, „motor overtemperature alarm“ (H)

HIGH signal: „Motor overtemperature“ alarm
Significance ♦ It involves „motor I2t alarm“ (A029).
♦ The prerequisite for the alarm is fulfilled by calculating the motor load (r008).
♦ Parameters used in the calculation: P362 (Motor cooling), P363 (Mot.ThermT-Const), P364
(Mot. Load Limits).
+ Chapter 12 „Fault and alarm messages“
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CU, TSY, SCI1/2) with L signal.

Bit 26: Signal, „motor overtemperature fault“ (H)

HIGH signal: High signal: „motor overtemperature“ fault
Significance ♦ It involves a „motor I2t fault“ (F021).
+ Chapter 12 „Fault and alarm messages“
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CU, TSY, SCI1/2) with L signal.

Bit 27: Signal, „technology controller actual value greater than technology controller setpoint“ (H)
HIGH signal: The technology controller actual value (r534) is greater than the technology controller setpoint
(r529).
Significance ♦ The signal is set when the technology controller setpoint is exceeded.
♦ If the technology controller actual value becomes less than the technology controller setpoint, a
hysteresis (P535) is also taken into account.

Bit 28: Signal, „motor stall“ (H)

HIGH signal: „Motor stalled or locked rotor“ fault (F015)
Significance ♦ The drive has either stalled or the rotor is locked.
+ Chapter 12 „Fault and alarm messages“
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CU, TSY, SCI1/2) with L signal.

Bit 29: Signal, „bypass contactor energized“ (H)

HIGH signal: The bypass (pre-charging) contactor is energized (closed).
Significance ♦ A bypass contactor (option) can be energized (closed) with the appropriate wiring and
parameterization.
+ Chapter „Options“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 1

Bit 30: Reserved

Bit 31: „Pre-charging active“ signal (H)

HIGH signal: PRE-CHARGING (010) status
Significance ♦ Pre-charging is executed after an ON command.

Siemens AG 6SE7080-0XX20 5-19

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Betriebsanleitung
Process data 08.96

5.3 Setpoints
Introduction and application example

The setpoints are process data in the sense of the explanation in Section 3.2.

An individual source can be parameterized for every setpoint, from which the setpoint may be entered (fixed
values, analog inputs, PMU, PZD part of the telegram from automation units).

The select parameters for the sources are indexed twice:

Index i001: Basic setting (BASE)
Index i002: Reserve setting (RES)

One parameter is available for the setpoints to „connect“ the source(s).

Example for connecting-up the sources:

The main setpoint should be „connected“ to analog input 1 of the CU (terminal -X102:27,28) as voltage input in
the basic setting:

♦ From the setpoint table, it is possible to identify that the factory setting of parameter P443.1 of the main
setpoint value is 1002
♦ In table B for the possible sources of the main setpoint, it can be seen that 1002 corresponds to the
„motorized potentiometer“ source.
♦ In the setpoint table, it can be seen that the possible sources for the main setpoint are written into tables X,
Y and B.
♦ The parameter value for the required source is searched for in tables X, Y and B. For analog input 1 of the
CU, the value is found in Table X. The result is 1003.
♦ This parameter value must now be entered into parameter P443.1.

Designation Parameter Possible sources Parameter value Required source wiring

Main setpoint (GRD) P443.1 Tab.X,Y,B 1003 AE1 terminal -X102:27,28,29

An amplification factor (P444.1) is available for parameter P443.1, which can be set as required.

Gain Normalization Visualization

Supplementary setpoint P428 P429 4000Hex = P420 r431
Main setpoint P443 P444 4000Hex = P420 r447
Technology controller setpoint P526 P527 4000Hex = 100 % r529
Technology controller actual value P531 P532 4000Hex = 100 % r534

Table 5.1 Interdependecies of the parameters for gain, normalization and visualization

5-20 Siemens AG 6SE7080-0XX20

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Betriebsanleitung
08.96 Process data

5.3.1 Overview of the setpoints

Designation Param. No. Fac. setting Possible Gain Fac. set.

BAS (RES) BAS (RES) sources BAS (RES) BAS+RES
Supplementary setpoint 1 P428.1 (2) 0 (0) Tab.X, A P429.1 (2) 100.00
Main setpoint P443.1 (2) 1002 (1001) Tab.X, B P444.1 (2) 100.00
Technology controller setpoint P526.1 (2) 0 (0) Tab.X, A P527.1 (2) 100.00
Technology controller actual value P531.1 (2) 0 (0) Tab.X, C P532.1 (2) 100.00
Table 5.2 Setpoints

5.3.2 Selecting the possible setpoint sources

Table X Table A

CU BOARD Value Source 1) only when word4 is not

Value Source 1001 Fixed setpoint assigned for „control word2“
0000 Constant setpoint 0 − for source P428: with 2004 (Section 5.1)
1003 Analog input 1 P421 to P424 2) only if word4 is not assigned for
1004 Analog input 2
− for source P526: P525 „control word2“ with 6004
2002 SST1 word 2
1020 Technology controller (Section 5.1)
2003 SST1 word 3
output 3) only if word4 is not assigned for
2004 SST1 word 4 1)
„control word2“ with 3004
… Consecutively to
Table B (Section 5.1)
2016 SST1 word 16
OPTIONS 4) only if word1 is not assigned for
Value Source „control word2“ with 4501
Value Source
1001 Fixed setpoint (Section 5.1)
3002 PT/CB word 2
(P421 to P424) 5) only if word4 is not assigned for
3003 PT/CB word 3
3004 PT/CB word 4 3) 1002 Motorized potentiometer „control word2“ with 4504
… Consecutively to 1020 Technology controller (Section 5.1)
3016 PT/CB word 16 output
4101 SCI1, slave1, AE1
4102 SCI1, slave1, AE2 Table C
4103 SCI1, slave1, AE3
4201 SCI1, slave2, AE1 Value Source
4202 SCI1, slave2, AE2 1100 Technology controller
4203 SCI1, slave2, AE3 actual value 1: P530.1
4501 SCB1/2 (peer to peer) 1200 Technology controller
word 1 4) actual value 2: P530.2
4502 SCB1/2 (peer to peer,
USS) word 2
4503 SCB1/2 (peer to peer,
USS) word 3
4504 SCB1/2 (peer to peer,
USS) word 4 5)
… Consecutively to
4505 SCB1/2 (peer to peer,
USS) word 5
4506 SCB2 (USS) word 6
… Consecutively to
4516 SCB2 (USS) word 16

Siemens AG 6SE7080-0XX20 5-21

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Betriebsanleitung
Process data 08.96

5.4 Actual values

Actual values are process data in the sense of the explanation in Section 3.2.
Three destinations are available in the basic version to output actual values.
Three additional output devices can be parameterized via option boards.
The contents of all available parameters of the basic drive converter can be selected as output values.
In order to connect a parameter to a destination, its parameter number must be entered in the selected
destination parameter.

NOTES
♦ When selecting an indexed parameter, the value of the first index is always output!
♦ When entering a „0“ instead of a parameter number, an output is not made to the appropriate destination!

Destinations:
P530 „ActVal’s ProcReg“
Output at the technology controller actual value input
Indices: i001 Value 1 for the technology controller actual value input (P531 = 1100)
i002 Value 2 for the technology controller actual value input (P531 = 1200)
+ Chapter 10 „Function diagrams, closed-loop control“

P655 „CU-AA actual values“

Output via the CU control terminal strip (Chapter 1)
Analog output (-X102:34 / reference potential -X102:33)
+ Section 6.4 „Analog output“

P680 „SCom1 Act Value“

Output via the basic converter interface SST1
Indices: i001 Word 01 of the telegram (PZD)
⇓ ⇓
i016 Word 16 of the telegram (PZD)
+ Section 6.5 „Basic converter interface SST1“

5-22 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Process data

Destination, options:
P664 „SCI-AA actual values“
Output via the SCB1 interface with SCI1
+ Instruction Manual for the option boards
Indexes i001 Destination: Analog output 1 from slave 1
i002 Destination: Analog output 2 from slave 1
i003 Destination: Analog output 3 from slave 1
i004 Destination: Analog output 1 from slave 2
i005 Destination: Analog output 2 from slave 2
i006 Destination: Analog output 3 from slave 2

P690 „SCB actual values“

Output via the SCB1 interface with peer-to-peer protocol or SCB2
+ Instruction Manual for the option boards
Indexes: i001 Destination: Word 01 of the telegram (PZD)
⇓ ⇓
i016 Destination: Word 16 of the telegram (PZD)

P694 „CB/TB actual values“

Output via the CB or TB interface
+ Instruction Manual for the option boards and Sections 6.5.2 „DPR“
Indices: i001 Destination: Word 01 of the telegram (PZD)
⇓ ⇓
i016 Destination: Word 16 of the telegram (PZD)

NOTE
For telegram data transfer (P680, P690, P694), it is generally necessary/practical to assign „word 01 of the
telegram (PZD)“ with status word 1 (r968 or r552)!

Normalization:
The values of the parameters to be output are weighted with the normalization relationship specified in the
parameter list.
For example, r004 (output current) is referred to 4 x P102 (Mot.curr(n)), i.e. 100 % corresponds to 400 %
rated motor current.

Examples:
1) Technology controller
The output power (r005) of the control should be fed to the technology controller as second actual value.
P530.02 = 005
P531.01 = 1200 (basic setting)

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 5-23

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Interfaces

6 Interfaces

6.1 Binary inputs

Five binary inputs (24 V) which can be parameterized are available at the control terminal strip of board CU
(-X101). These inputs can be used to input commands, external faults/alarms as well as checkback signal at
the control word of the drive converter.
Connecting-up: + Chapter 1 „Control terminal strip“.
Parameterization: + Section 5.1 „Control word“.
Factory setting (valid for standby operation):

Binary Command Control Parameter

input HIGH LOW word bit
1 ON OFF1 0 P554.2 = 1001 (reserve)
2 ON OFF2 (electrical) 1 P555.2 = 1002 (reserve)
3 Acknowledge 7 P565.2 = 1003 (reserve)
4 FSW-Bit 0 = 1 FSW-Bit 0 = 0 20 P580.2 = 1004 (reserve)
5 Reserve setting Basic setting 30 P590 = 1005

Table 6.1 Binary inputs

6.2 Binary outputs

There are two binary outputs which can be parameterized.
These outputs can be used to output signals and external commands of the drive converter status word.
Connecting-up: Binary output 1 at the basic drive converter (connector -X9):
+ Section „Auxilary power supply / main contactor“ in Operating Instructions, Part 1
Binary output 2 on the control terminal strip of board CU (connector -X100):
+ Chapter 1 „Control terminal strip“
Parameterization: + Section 5.2 „Status word“.
Factory setting ( not valid for cabinet units):

Binary Connector, Signal Status- Parameter

output location HIGH LOW word bit
1 -X9 Main contactor Main contactor not 12 P612.1 = 1001
energized energized
2 -X100 on the CU Fault No fault 3 P603.1 = 1002

Table 6.2 Binary outputs

NOTE
Faults, alarms and power-on inhibit (HIGH active) are displayed as LOW active via the terminal strip
(binary outputs)
+ Section 5.2 „Status word“.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 6-1

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Interfaces 08.96

6.3 Analog inputs

Control board CU has 2 analog inputs (AI), which can be used to input setpoints via voltage- or current signals
or as speed actual value input (Connection + Chapter 1).

Technical data:

Setpoint input via voltage Setpoint via current Speed actual value input
♦ Input voltage range: ♦ Input current range: ♦ Input voltage range:
• −10 V to +10 V • −20 mA to +20 mA ♦ −10 V to +10 V (use the ATI
• 0 V to +10 V • 0 mA to 20 mA board for higher tachometer
voltages!)
• + 2 V to +10 V • 4 mA to 20 mA
♦ Resolution 20 mV ♦ Resolution 0,04 mA
(9 bit + sign) (9 bit + sign)
♦ Accuracy ± 0,6 % ♦ Accuracy ± 0,7 % ♦ Use a shielded cable and
♦ Stability at ∆T = 10 K: 0,2% ♦ Stability at ∆T = 10 K: 0,2% connect at one end to the drive
converter.
♦ Smoothing 3.5 ms ♦ Smoothing 3.5 ms

Table 6.3 Technical data of the analog inputs

Using P208.x, it can be defined as to whether the analog input should be used as tachometer input (refer to
Section 6.3.2).

P208.x Analog input AE1 Analog input AE2

3 Analog tach. input
4 Analog tach. input

Table 6.4 Speed feedback

6.3.1 Analog input as setpoint input

Signal flow for any setpoint; the overview of the possible setpoints is located in Section 5.3.1. (+ Function
diagrams „Analog inputs“, Chapter 10):

Smoothing Offset
3.5 ms P652.1(2) P 650.1(2) Range Terminal Visualization
AE1 (AE2) G ain parameter

ADC 0 -10 V to +10 V 27 (30)

27 (30) Setpoint
n 0 V to +10 V 27 (30) connection:
29 (32)
# 1 0 mA to +20 mA 29 (32) refer to Section
5.3.1
2 +4 mA to + 20 mA 29 (32)
28 (31)
Normalization For setpoint =
Main setpoint:
Basic setpoint

Fig. 6.1 Analog input as setpoint input

6-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Interfaces

Parameters for gain, normalization and visualization belonging to a specific setpoint connection:

Gain Normalization Visualization

Supplementary setpoint P428 P429 10 V = P420 r431
Main setpoint P443 P444 10 V = P420 r447
Technology controller setpoint P526 P527 10 V = 100 % r529
Technology controller actual value P531 P532 10 V = 100 % r534

Table 6.5 Inter-relationships between parameters for gain, normalization and visualization

Parameterization:
♦ Connect the setpoint to the required analog input
(e.g.: P443.1 = 1003: The main setpoint is connected to analog input 1 (basic setting)).
♦ P650.1(2) = Defines the input signal for analog input 1(2)
(± 10 V, 0 to 10 V / 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA).

NOTE
For P650 = 2 (4 to 20 mA), setpoints < 2 mA result in a fault trip (wire breakage monitoring function)

♦ When required, adjust the zero point (offset adjustment) for setpoint input ‘0’.
In this case, P652.1(2) is changed until the setpoint visualization parameter (corresponding to Table 6.5) is
‘0’, e.g. r447.
♦ When required, set the gain (parameter according to Table 6.5) e.g. P444.

Calculating the gain using as an example, the main setpoint (including the basic setpoint):
Setpoint [Hz]
Values X1 to X2 at the analog input should be represented at setpoints Y1 to Y2.
♦ ±10 V and 0 to 10 V:
Y2

10 V Y2 - Y1
P444. x = × × 100%
X 2 - X1 P420
Y1
X 2 Y1 - X1Y2 1
P445. x = × × 100%
X 2 - X1 P420 X1 0 X2
Analog input
[V or mA]
♦ 4 mA to 20 mA:
Fig. 6.2 Gain
16 mA Y - Y1
P444. x = × 2 × 100%
X 2 - X1 P420

P445. x =
(X2 - 4 mA) × Y1 - (X1 - 4 mA) × Y2 ×
1
× 100%
X 2 - X1 P420

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 6-3

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Interfaces 08.96

Example of setpoint input via analog input:

In the basic setting, the main setpoint for motor data set 1 should be entered via analog input 1.
Setting range: 0 to 10 V should correspond to + 15 Hz to + 50 Hz. Setpoint [Hz]
50 Y2
Rated system frequency P420 = 50 Hz.
Parameterization:
♦ P443.1 = 1003 The basic setting for the main setpoint is connected to
analog input 1. 15 Y1
X1 X2
♦ P650.1 = 1 The input voltage range for AE1 is set to 0 to 10 V
0 10
♦ P651.1 = 4 The smoothing time constant of AE1 is 4 ms Analog input [V]
(if required, change). Fig. 6.3 Setpoint input via
analog input
♦ P652.1 = 0.000 AE 1 does not have a zero point deviation. When required,
change P652.1 until the main setpoint, r447=0, for setpoint
input ‘0’.
♦ Set gain P444.1 and basic setpoint P445.1:
10 V 50 Hz -15 Hz
P444.1= × × 100 % = 70 %
10 V - 0 V 50 Hz
10 V × 15 Hz - 0 V × 50 Hz 1
P445.1= × × 100 % = 30 %
10 V - 0 V 50 Hz

Example without offset (P420 = 50 Hz):

♦ P445 = 0
♦ Setting range ± 10 V ± 50 Hz : P444 = 100 %
± 10 V ± 100 Hz : P444 = 200 %

6-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Interfaces

6.3.2 Analog input as speed actual value input

For drive converter output frequencies up to 100 Hz, an analog tachometer can be used for speed sensing.
Generally, the ATI option is used as interface between the tachometer and board CU.

P208.x
Offset
P652.1(2) n act, encoder
AE1 (AE2) 0
r214
Analog tach. Smoothing
ADC 1 adjustment P221
27 (30)
n 2 P210.x
29 (32)
# To the
AE1 speed controller
3
28 (31)
4
AE2

Fig. 6.4 Analog input as speed actual value input

Parameterization:
♦ P052 = 5 „Drive setting“ function
♦ P053 = 3 „Expert mode“ access stage
♦ P208.x = 3 The speed actual value is received via analog input 1,
or 4 speed actual value is received via analog input 2.
♦ P210.x = Enter the maximum occuring speed (in RPM) (it is absolutely necessary that the speed
overshoot is taken into account - typical value: 10 %!).
An input signal of 10 V at the analog input corresponds to the speed set here.
♦ P163.x = 1 control with V/Hz characteristic
♦ P052 = 0 Return from the „drive setting“ function
♦ With the motor stationary, select r214 (n(act, encoder)), and if required, adjust the zero point using
P652.1(2).
♦ If possible, de-couple the motor from the load.
♦ Power-up the unit and operate the drive at various speeds. Measure the speed, for example, using a hand-
held tachometer, and adjust the potentiometer on the ATI board so that the measured value coincdies with
the display in r214.
♦ If the motor is operated under no load (no-load operation), it is adjusted, if the setpoint and actual value
speeds are the same (r482 = r214).
♦ P651.1(2) smoothing time constant ineffective, use P221 for smoothing.
♦ P052 = 5 „Drive setting“ function
♦ P163.x = 0 V/Hz+speed control
♦ P052 = 0 Return from „drive setting“
♦ When required, the speed actual value can be smoothed via P221, and a maximum value for the permissible
speed change entered using P215 (+ the function diagrams in Chapter 10).
Special case: The tachometer voltage at the maximum occuring speed is < 10 V.
♦ Connect the tachometer voltage directly at the analog input.
♦ Set P210.x to that speed, where the tachometer voltage is 10 V (the value can exceed the maximum
occuring speed).

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 6-5

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Interfaces 08.96

Example for using the analog input as speed actual value input:
The speed actual value is to be fed in via analog input 2.
Tachometer and system data: Analog tachometer with 30 V / 1000 RPM
Speed at the maximum setpoint: 1700 RPM
Parameterization:
♦ Ground the tachometer cable shield at 1 end, at the drive converter.
If noise is coupled-in, connect a 100 nF capacitor to the motor housing.
♦ P052 = 5 „Drive setting“ function
♦ P053 = 3 „Expert mode“ access stage
♦ P208.1 = 4 Connect the speed actual value to analog input 2.
♦ P210.x = Enter the maximum occuring speed (in RPM):
1700 RPM + e.g. 8 % for overshoot → 1836 RPM.
♦ Tachometer voltage at the maximum speed: 55 V -> the ATI board is required.
♦ P163.1 = 1 Control with V/Hz characteristic
♦ P052 = 0 return from the „drive setting“
♦ With the motor stationary, select r214, and if required, adjust the zero point using P652.2.
♦ Power-up the unit and operate the drive at various speeds (e.g. 500, 1000 and 1500 RPM). Measure the
speed, for example, using a handheld tachometer, and adjust the potentiometer on the ATI board so that the
measured value coincides with the display in r214 (the display is realized in Hz).
♦ Specify additional steps as above.

6-6 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Interfaces

6.4 Analog output

The CU control board has 1 analog output (AO) to output actual values and other internal quantities of the drive
converter (Connection + Chapter 1).

Technical data:
♦ Output voltage range −10 V to +10 V
♦ 40 mV resolution (8 bits + sign)
♦ Accuracy ± 2 %
♦ Output current, max. ± 5 mA
♦ Short-circuit proof
♦ Not floating
Additional details, + Function diagram „Analog output“, Chapter 10.

Normalization- P655
relationship acc.. CU-AA
P656 P657
to parameter list act. values
CU-AA- CU-AA
r001 1 r001 gain offset
16384 Analog output
DAC AO
r004 1 ... + 10 V 34
4 x P102 ... #
r218 1 ... n 1 ms
... - 10 V
P420 33

... 1
xxx r999

Fig. 6.5 Analog output

Normalization:

The values of the parameters to be output are weighted with the normalization relationships specified in the
parameter list (e.g. r004 (output current) referred to 4 x p102 (rated motor current).

Example:

P656 = 10 V
Analog output = 10 V, if r004 = 4 x P102

P656 = 40 V
Analog output = 10 V, if r004 = P102

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 6-7

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Interfaces 08.96

Parameterization:
♦ The number of the parameter, whose value is to be output at the Output
analog output, is entered in P655 (CU-AA actual values). voltage

♦ Corresponding to points X2,Y2 and X1,Y1, the required analog Y2

output characteristics are defined, set gain P656 and offset P657:

Y2 - Y1
P656 =
( )
X 2 - X1 / ref. quantity
Y1 X2

P657 =
( Y1X 2 ) - ( Y2 X1) 0 X1 Quantity to be
X 2 - X1 Offset P657.x displayed
Fig. 6.6 Analog output

Output
1. The output current (r004) should be represented as 0 V to +10 V at voltage [V]
the analog output, in the range 32 A to 160 A. +10
The rated motor current (P102) is 40.0 A.
Parameterization:
♦ P655 = 004 The output current is connected to the analog
output.
♦ The reference quantity for r004 is taken from the parameter list.
It is 4 x P102. 0 32 160 r004 [A]

Set the gain and offset: Offset P657

Fig. 6.7 Example, output current at the
10 V - 0 V analog output
♦ P656 = = 12.5 V
(160 A - 32 A) / ( 4 x 40 A)
( 0 V x 160 A) - (10 V x 32 A)
P657 = = - 2.50 V
160 A - 32 A

2. The frequency actual value (r218) is to be represented from -10 V to Output

voltage [V]
+10 V at the analog output from −2 Hz to + 5 Hz.
+10
The rated system frequency (P420) is 100 Hz.

Parameterization: -2 0 5 r218 [Hz]

♦ P655 = 218 The frequency actual value is connected to the analog Offset P657
output.
-10
♦ Take the reference quantity for r218 from the parameter list. It is
Fig. 6.8 Example, frequency actual
P420. value at the analog output
♦ Set the gain and offset:
10 V + 10 V
P656 = = 285.71 V
( 5 Hz + 2 Hz) / 100 Hz
( - 10 V x 5 Hz) - (10 V x (-2 Hz))
P657 = = - 4.29 V
5 Hz + 2 Hz

6-8 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Interfaces

6.5 Serial interfaces

6.5.1 Basic converter interface SST1

The USS protocol (universal serial interface) is implemented at the basic converter interface SST1.

The following documentation is available depending on the particular application of the SST1 basic converter
interface:
♦ Connecting a PC / PG with SIMOVIS software for start-up / service operator control:
The documentation is provided on SIMOVIS floppy disks in files BEDANLTG.TXT (ASCII format) and
BEDANLTG.WRI (WRITE format).
♦ Connecting higher-level PLCs with the USS protocol:
SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES
Using the serial interfaces with USS protocol
Order No.: 6SE7087-6CX87-4KB0

Additional general comments regarding connecting-up and parameterization:

♦ Connecting-up: + Chapter 1 „Control terminal strip“ -X107

NOTE
Communications can either be realized via the terminal strip of CU -X100
(RS485 standard) or the interface connector on PMU -X300 (9-pin SUB D
connector / RS485 or RS232 (V24)).
Only one of the two possible connections may be used!
PMU
S1
When connecting SST2 via the terminal strip (-X100), of the CU, a four-wire
connection can be implemented. The changeover between two- and four-wire
connection is realized automatically. -X100
-X101
NOTE
The bus terminating resistors (total 150 Ω) must be switched-in at the last -X102
bus node (slave). + Fig. 6.9 for the position of the jumpers S1.
• SST1: Close jumpers S1.1 and S1.2 of DIP-FIX S1 on the CU

Parameterization: Fig. 6.9 CU

• Define the process data: P683 bis P687

• Connect process data (control word, status word, setpoints, actual
values) to the interfaces
+ Chapter 5 „Process data“
• Enabling parameterization: P053 oder P927

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 6-9

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Interfaces 08.96

6.5.2 Dual port RAM (DPR for SCB, TSY, CB, TB)

The dual port RAM is the internal interface on the CU (-X107) to connect possible option boards via the LBA
(Local Bus Adapter, option) of the electronics box.

Possible option boards:

• TSY (tachometer- and synchronization board),
• TB (Technology board),
• SCB (serial communications board),
• CB (Communications board).
To connect possible option boards and parameterize the interface, + Chapter „Options“ in the Operating
Instructions, Part 1 as well as the Operating Instructions of the option boards.

Additional information, + Chapter 5 „Process data“.

6-10 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Interfaces

6.6 Ramp-function generator (RFG) and limiting stage in front of the

ramp-function generator
A detailed description as supplement to the „Function diagrams, setpoint channel CU“, Chapter 10

6.6.1 Ramp-function generator, RFG

f [Hz]

fsys. rated

OFF1 with rounding off

without
round. off

OFF1
with OFF2 OFF3 without rounding off
rounding off

foff

T d e la y T d e la y t [s]
T ram p-up

t3
t1

fset - foff
Ramp down time for an OFF1 command: t1 = TOFF1-ramp down × + Tdelay
fAnl-rated
fset - foff
Ramp down time for an OFF3 command: t 3 = TOFF3-ramp down × + Tdelay
fAnl-rated

Fig. 6.10 Ramp-function generator

For a detailed description of the OFF1-, OFF2- and OFF3 commands, refer to Section 5.1.2 „Control word 1“

Parameters for setting the acceleration time

P420 Rated system frequency (frated system) 1.00 Hz to 300.00 Hz

P462 Acceleration time (Tramp-up) i001 SDS1 0.1 s to 999.9 s

i002 SDS2
Acceleration time from standstill up to rated system frequency (P420)

P464 Deceleration time i001 SDS1 0.1 s to 999.9 s

(Tdeceleration) i002 SDS2
Deceleration time in s from the rated system frequency (P420) down to standstill

P466 OFF3 deceleration time (Toff 3 deceleration) 0.1 s to 999.9 s

Deceleration time for the OFF3 command (if DC braking, P372 is not selected) in s from the rated system
frequency (P420) down to standstill.
Rounding-off (P468) is de-activated.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 6-11

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Interfaces 08.96

P467 Protective ramp-up Kp i001 SDS1 1.0 to 100.0

i002 SDS2
Factor from 1.0 to 100.0 referred to the acceleration time, P462 to f [Hz]
enter a protective ramp-up time. P420
Using the protective ramp-up, the acceleration time up to 15% of the P107
rated motor frequency (P107) can be extended (+ Fig. 6.11
„Protective ramp-up“). P467 = 2

Protective ramp-up is not activated for 1.0. 15 % P107

The total run-up (acceleration time) can be calculated according to T 15 % P107 t [s]
15 P107
total run - up = P462 + P462 x x x (P462 − 1) 2T 15 % P107 (P467 = 2)
100 P420
T accel. P462

Fig. 6.11 Protective ramp-up

P468 Rounding-off i001 SDS1 0 % to 50 %

i002 SDS2
Rounding-off in % referred to the acceleration time, P462 when accelerating or the deceleration time, P464,
when decelerating.
♦ Example: Acceleration time P462, = 10 s rounding-off = 10 %. Thus, a rounding-off time of 1s is obtained.
The same is valid for the deceleration time.
♦ If the motorized potentiometer is active (control word bits 13 and 14 set, + Section 5.1), rounding-off is not
realized.

P514 OFF shutdown frequency (foff) 0.00 Hz to 300.0 Hz

As soon as the „speed/frequency actual value“ r218 reaches the OFF shutdown frequency, P14 when the
drive decelerates (OFF1 or OFF3 without DC braking, P372), then the OFF delay time P516, starts to run.
After this, the inverter pulses are inhibited.

P516 OFF delay time (Tdelay) i001 SDS1 0.0 s to 60.0 s

i002 SDS2
Delay time for OFF1 and OFF3 (if no DC braking, P372 is selected for OFF3) in s.
As soon as the „speed/frequency actual value“ (r218) reaches the OFF shutdown frequency (P514) when the
drive decelerates, the OFF delay time starts to run. The inverter pulses are then inhibited.

Further, it is still possible to inhibit or hold the ramp-function generator via the „Control word“ (Section 5.1).

6-12 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Interfaces

6.6.2 Limit value stage in front of the ramp-function generator

SDS / MDS 2
1

P 452, m ax. freq. (R D F )

P564.x
2 Hz P455 , suppress. freq. S.. setpoint
. enable

r460
R F G input
r451
P457 min. freq. RESV
0 Hz BASIC
- P457 1
- 0 0
Sum pt. 1

Setpoint enable

2 Hz - P455 , suppress. freq.

P 453 , m ax. freq. (LD F )

Fig. 6.12 Limit value stage before the ramp-function generator

P452 Max. frequency (RDF) i001 MDS1 0.0 Hz to 300.0 Hz

Clockwise phase sequence i002 MDS2
Max. setpoint frequency for a clockwise phase sequence

P453 Max. frequency (LDF) i001 MDS1 − 300.0 Hz to 0.0 Hz

Counter-clockwise phase i002 MDS2
sequence
Max. setpoint frequency for a counter-clockwise phase sequence

P455 Suppression frequency i001 SDS1 0.0 Hz to 300.0 Hz

i002 SDS2
Frequency suppression of ± 1 Hz on each side of the parameterized suppression frequency (is valid for
positive and negative setpoints), in order to prevent steady-state drive operation at possible resonant
frequencies.
♦ Steady-state operation in a parameterized 2 Hz suppression bandwidth is therefore not possible; the range
can only be run-through.
♦ For a setpoint at summation point 1 in front of the ramp-function generator, r451, which lies within the
suppression bandwidth, the setpoint, increasing from below is held at the lower limit, and the setpoint
decreasing from above, is held at the upper limit.
♦ The suppression bandwidth is not activated when a suppression frequency of 0.0 to 1.0 Hz is entered.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 6-13

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Interfaces 08.96

P457 Min. frequency i001 SDS1 –300.0 Hz to 300.0 Hz

i002 SDS2 ≤ Max. frequency LDF/RDF
It is possible to realize a 0 Hz frequency suppression using the minimum frequency.
♦ Steady-state operation in the range 0 Hz ± minimum frequency is therefore not possible; the range can
only be run-through.
♦ After the drive has been switched-on, and for a setpoint at summation point 1 in front of the ramp-function
generator, r451, in the range from 0 Hz up to the positive minimum frequency, the positive minimum
frequency is approached, and in the range 0 Hz to the negative minimum frequency, the negative minimum
frequency.
♦ In operation, and for a setpoint at summation point 1 in front of the ramp-function generator, r451, in the
suppression bandwidth (0 Hz ± minimum frequency), the setpoint, increasing from below is held at the
lower limit, and the setpoint decreasing from above, is held at the upper limit.
♦ The drive can be reversed by entering a setpoint (reference) frequency at summation point 1, which lies
outside the suppression bandwidth.

6-14 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Open-loop and closed-loop control types

7 Open-loop and closed-loop control types

7.1 V/f characteristic

A detailed description as supplement to the „Function diagrams, V/f characteristic“, Section 4.4

MDS 2
1
Vset in [V]
P170 ≠ P107

P101

P170 = P107
(standard drives)
P165 = 0
(linear characteristic)

Boost P165 = 1
(parabolic characteristic)

0
0 P169 P107 P170 fset in [Hz]
P170

Fig. 7.1 V/f characteristic

Boost: ♦ P166 = 0: current reference: P167 (taking into account P272)

♦ P166 = 1: voltage reference: P168
♦ P171: Acceleration current

P101 Motor voltage (n) i001: MDS1 115.0 V to 1600.0 V

i002: MDS2
Rating plate value of the rated motor voltage (observe whether the motor is connected in star or delta!)
For SIMOSYN motors: Voltage at the rated drive frequency

P107 Motor frequency (n) i001: MDS1 8.0 Hz to 300.0 Hz

i002: MDS2
Rating plate value of the rated motor frequency

P165 Characterisic i001: MDS1 0 and 1

i002: MDS2
V/f characteristic type: 0: Linear characteristic (constant-torque drives)
1: Parabolic characteristic (fans and pumps)

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 7-1

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Open-loop and closed-loop control types 08.96

P166 Boost i001: MDS1 0 and 1

i002: MDS2
Select the boost reference type (for high-inertia starting and compensating the ohmic voltage drops across the
motor feeder/stator winding of the drives at low frequencies):
0: Current reference via P167
Voltage for f = 0 Hz for the starting current (conversion using P272 (R (stator + feeder cable))
1: Voltage reference via P168
Voltage for f = 0 Hz

P167 Boost current i001: MDS1 10.0 % to 400.0 %

i002: MDS2
Only valid for current reference: (P166 = 0)
Boost current for f=0 Hz as a % referred to the rated motor current (P102)
♦ The boost current is reduced to 0 when the boost end frequency (P169) is reached.
♦ The boost current is converted into a voltage boost taking into account (P272 (R (stator + feeder cable)).

NOTE
P272 (R(stator + feeder cable)) should be calculated or measured using „Automatic parameterization“ or even
better, using „motor identification“ (function selection P052, + Section 8.1)!

P168 Boost voltage i001: MDS1 10.00 % to 25.00 %

i002: MDS2
Only valid for voltage reference: (P166 = 1)
Boost voltage at f = 0 Hz as a % referred to the rated motor voltage (P101)
♦ The boost voltage is reduced to 0 when the „boost end frequency“ (P169) is reached.
♦ P168 is calculated during „automatic parameterization“ or „motor identification“ (function selection P052,
+ Section 8.1).

P169 Boost end frequency i001: MDS1 0.0 Hz to 300.0 Hz

i002: MDS2
In the range from 0 Hz up to the boost end frequency, the voltage boost value (P167 or P168) is reduced to 0
♦ Special case:
For P169 = 0.0 Hz and specified voltage boost (P167 ≠ 0 % or P168 ≠ 0 %), the voltage from 0 Hz up to
the intersection point of the non-boosted V/f characteristic is kept constant to the value corresponding to
the reference entered using P167 or P168 (horizontal boost).
♦ P169 is set to 20% of the rated motor frequency (P107) using the „automatic parameterization“ (function
selection P052, + Section 8.1).

P170 Field weakening frequency i001: MDS1 8.0 Hz to 300.0 Hz

i002: MDS2
Frequency at the start of field weakening
♦ The voltage is kept constant above this frequency limit. When the conveter voltage limit (r181) is reached
before this frequency, field weakening is started appropriately earlier. The actual field-weakening frequency
can be read from parameter r182 (field weakfrq(act)).
♦ P170 is set to the rated motor frequency (P107) (standard drives) during „automatic parameterization“
(function selection P052, + Section 8.1).

7-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Open-loop and closed-loop control types

P171 Acceleration current i001: MDS1 0.0 % to 799.9 %

i002: MDS2
Acceleration current (supplementary boost current) for active acceleration for high-inertia starting as a [%]
referred to the rated motor current (P102)
♦ The acceleration current is only switched-in up to the „boost end frequency“ (P169).
♦ The acceleration current is converted into a voltage boost taking into account P272 (R(stator total)).

NOTE
P272 „R(stator, total)“ should be calculated or measured using „automatic parameterization“ or even better
using „motor identification“ (function selection P052, + Section 8.1!

Further, it is possible,
♦ to set load-dependent voltage injection to compensate for voltage drops across the motor feede cables using
P172 „IxR compensation Kp“.
♦ to set soft starting P190 (to ramp-up the characteristic voltage when powering-up within the excitation time
P189).

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 7-3

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Start-up functions

8 Start-up functions

8.1 Function selection (P052)

Function selection is activated via parameter P052 and permits various special functions during the start-up
phase.

Condition: Access stage 2 (P051 = 2) must be enabled and the converter may only be in the „Run“ (R) status.

The following functions are available:

♦ Return from function selection (P052 = 0)
♦ Factory setting (P052 = 1)
♦ Initialization (P052 = 2)
♦ Download (P052 = 3)
♦ Hardware configuration (P052 = 4)
♦ Drive setting (P052 = 5)
♦ Automatic parameterization (P052 = 6)
♦ Motor identification at standstill (P052 = 7)
The „factory setting“, „automatic parameterization“, and „motor identification at standstill“ functions are
automatically reset after completion, i.e. P052=0 („return“).
The other functions must be manually reset!

P052 = 5 can be exited using P052 = 0, 6, 7, 8, 11.

P052 = 6 can only be selected from the "drive setting" (P052 = 5).

8.1.1 Factory setting (P052 = 1)

Function: This function is used to establish the factory setting (the same as when the unit was shipped) for
all of the parameters (+ Chapter 11 „Parameter list“). Observe the pre-setting of P077!
Condition: The „factory setting“ can be realized in the status DRIVE SETTING (005), FAULT (007), SWITCH-
ON INHIBIT (008) or READY TO SWITCH-ON (009).
Result: In this case, several drive converter- and motor data as well as several open-loop/closed-loop
control parameters („automatic parameterization“) are set according to the drive converter type
(MLFB dependent / P070).

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 8-1

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Start-up functions 08.96

Procedure:
⇓ P052 = 1 Function selection „Factory setting“
⇓ P key The numbers of the newly-assigned parameters are consecutively displayed:
♦ Factory setting of all parameters according to the parameter list (Chapter 11)
(also the board configuration P090/P091)
♦ Drive converter data (determined from the MLFB of the drive converter (P070)
P071 Drive converter supply voltage
P072 Drive converter current (n)
P073 Drive converter output (n)
♦ Motor data (determined from the MLFB of the drive converter (P070))
P101 Motor voltage (n)
P102 Motor current (n)
P104 Motor cos phi (n)
P105 Motor output (n)
P106 Motor efficiency (n)
P109 Motor pole pair number
P173 Imax (max. current)
♦ Open-loop/closed-loop control parameter
„Automatic parameterization“ is executed (+ Section 8.1.5). All motor data sets are re-
assigned.
⇓ After the factory setting has been completed, SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) or READY TO SWITCH-ON
(009) are displayed

8.1.2 Initialization (MLFB input) (P052 = 2)

Function: This function is used to change the model No. (unit type).
Condition: „Initialization“ can be realized in the DRIVE SETTING (005), FAULT (007), SWITCH-ON INHIBIT
(008) or READY TO SWITCH-ON (009).
Result: When the Model No. is changed the factory setting is only partially established (as when the unit
is shipped), depending on the new model No. The process data connection retained.
Procedure:
⇓ P051 = 3 access stage „Expert mode“ (in order to change P070)
⇓ P052 = 2 function selection „Initialization“
⇓ P070 = MLFB (specifies the MLFB (machine-readable product designation = model No.) of the drive
converter (+ type plate).
When changing the CU, the MLFB corresponding to the drive converter must be input.
When parameterizing via the PMU, the appropriate identification number (PWE) must
be specfied in accordance with the following table:

Table of SIMOVERT MASTER-DRIVES

minimum pulse frequency = 1.5 kHz
rated pulse frequency = 3.0 kHz

Brief description of the table columns:

PWE parameter value (enter for initialization / PMU / P070)
I(n) rated drive converter current in A (P072)
V cl. voltage class, voltage range

8-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Start-up functions

PWE Model No. I(n) U-Kl. PWE Model No. I(n) U-Kl.
1 6SE7014-5FB10 4,5 3AC 500-575 52 6SE7024-7ED10 47,0 3AC 380-460
2 6SE7014-5UB10 4,5 DC 675-780 53 6SE7024-7TD10 47,0 DC 510-620
3 6SE7016-1EA10 6,1 3AC 380-460 54 6SE7025-4CD10 54,0 3AC 208-230
4 6SE7016-1TA10 6,1 DC 510-620 55 6SE7025-4RD10 54,0 DC 280-310
5 6SE7016-2FB10 6,2 3AC 500-575 56 6SE7026-0ED10 59,0 3AC 380-460
6 6SE7016-2UB10 6,2 DC 675-780 57 6SE7026-0TD10 59,0 DC 510-620
7 6SE7017-8FB10 7,8 3AC 500-575 58 6SE7026-0HF10 60 3AC 660-690
8 6SE7017-8UB10 7,8 DC 675-780 59 6SE7026-0WF10 60 DC 890-930
9 6SE7018-0EA10 8,0 3AC 380-460 60 6SE7026-1FE10 61 3AC 500-575
10 6SE7018-0TA10 8,0 DC 510-620 61 6SE7026-1UE10 61 DC 675-780
11 6SE7021-0EA10 10,2 3AC 380-460 62 6SE7026-6FF10 66 3AC 500-575
12 6SE7021-0TA10 10,2 DC 510-620 63 6SE7026-6UF10 66 DC 675-780
14 6SE7021-1CA10 10,6 3AC 208-230 64 6SE7027-0CD10 69,0 3AC 208-230
15 6SE7021-1RA10 10,6 DC 280-310 65 6SE7027-0RD10 69,0 DC 280-310
16 6SE7021-1FB10 11,0 3AC 500-575 66 6SE7027-2ED10 72,0 3AC 380-460
17 6SE7021-1UB10 11,0 DC 675-780 67 6SE7027-2TD10 72,0 DC 510-620
18 6SE7021-3EB10 13,2 3AC 380-460 68 6SE7028-0FF10 79,0 3AC 500-575
19 6SE7021-3TB10 13,2 DC 510-620 69 6SE7028-0UF10 79,0 DC 675-780
21 6SE7021-3CA10 13,3 3AC 208-230 70 6SE7028-1CD10 81,0 3AC 208-230
22 6SE7021-3RA10 13,3 DC 280-310 71 6SE7028-1RD10 81,0 DC 280-310
23 6SE7021-5FB10 15,1 3AC 500-575 72 6SE7028-2HF10 82,0 3AC 660-690
24 6SE7021-5UB10 15,1 DC 675-780 73 6SE7028-2WF10 82,0 DC 890-930
25 6SE7021-8EB10 17,5 3AC 380-460 74 6SE7031-0EE10 92,0 3AC 380-460
26 6SE7021-8TB10 17,5 DC 510-620 75 6SE7031-0TE10 92,0 DC 510-620
27 6SE7021-8CB10 17,7 3AC 208-230 76 6SE7031-0HG10 97,0 3AC 660-690
28 6SE7021-8RB10 17,7 DC 280-310 77 6SE7031-0WG10 97,0 DC 890-930
30 6SE7022-2FC10 22,0 3AC 500-575 78 6SE7031-1FG10 108,0 3AC 500-575
31 6SE7022-2UC10 22,0 DC 675-780 79 6SE7031-1UG10 108,0 DC 675-780
32 6SE7022-3CB10 22,9 3AC 208-230 80 6SE7031-2HG10 118,0 3AC 660-690
33 6SE7022-3RB10 22,9 DC 280-310 81 6SE7031-2WG10 118,0 DC 890-930
35 6SE7022-6EC10 25,5 3AC 380-460 82 6SE7031-2EF10 124,0 3AC 380-460
36 6SE7022-6TC10 25,5 DC 510-620 83 6SE7031-2TF10 124,0 DC 510-620
37 6SE7023-0FD10 29,0 3AC 500-575 84 6SE7031-3FG10 128,0 3AC 500-575
38 6SE7023-0UD10 29,0 DC 675-780 85 6SE7031-3UG-10 128,0 DC 675-780
39 6SE7023-2CB10 32,2 3AC 208-230 88 6SE7031-5HG10 145,0 3AC 660-690
40 6SE7023-2RB10 32,2 DC 280-310 89 6SE7031-5WG10 145,0 DC 890-930
42 6SE7023-4EC10 34,0 3AC 380-460 90 6SE7031-5EF10 146,0 3AC 380-460
43 6SE7023-4TC10 34,0 DC 510-620 91 6SE7031-5TF10 146,0 DC 510-620
44 6SE7023-4FD10 34,0 3AC 500-575 94 6SE7031-6FG10 156,0 3AC 500-575
45 6SE7023-4UD10 34,0 DC 675-780 95 6SE7031-6UG10 156,0 DC 675-780
46 6SE7023-8ED10 37,5 3AC 380-460 96 6SE7031-7HG10 171,0 3AC 660-690
47 6SE7023-8TD10 37,5 DC 510-620 97 6SE7031-7WG10 171,0 DC 890-930
48 6SE7024-4CC10 44,2 3AC 208-230 98 6SE7031-8EF10 186,0 3AC 380-460
49 6SE7024-4RC10 44,2 DC 280-310 99 6SE7031-8TF10 186,0 DC 510-620
50 6SE7024-7FD10 46,5 3AC 500-575 100 6SE7032-0FH10 192,0 3AC 500-575
51 6SE7024-7UD10 46,5 DC 675-780 101 6SE7032-0UH10 192,0 DC 675-780

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 8-3

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Start-up functions 08.96

PWE Model No. I(n) U-Kl. PWE Model No. I(n) U-Kl.
102 6SE7032-1EG10 210,0 3AC 380-460 109 6SE7032-6TG10 260,0 DC 510-620
103 6SE7032-1TG10 210,0 DC 510-620 112 6SE7033-2EG10 315,0 3AC 380-460
104 6SE7032-3FH10 225,0 3AC 500-575 113 6SE7033-2TG10 315,0 DC 510-620
105 6SE7032-3UH10 225,0 DC 675-780 117 6SE7033-7TH10 370,0 DC 510-620
108 6SE7032-6EG10 260,0 3AC 380-460

⇓ P052 = 0 Function selection „return“

⇓ P key The operating display appears, and when the MLFB has been changed, the following
parameters are re-assigned:
♦ Equipment data and motor data (from the MLFB of the equipment (P070) determine), as
well open-loop/closed-loop control parameters („automatic parameterization“ over all data
sets as for function selection „factory setting“ (+ Section 8.1.1)).
The process data connections (e.g. analog inputs/outputs are retaineid).
⇓ SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) or READY TO SWITCH-ON (009) are displayed after initialization has been
completed.

8.1.2.1 Download (P052 = 3)

Function: It is used to read and change all parameters using a PC at the basic drive converter interface
SST1.
Condition: „Download“ is possible in the FAULT (007), SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) or READY TO SWITCH-
ON (009) statuses.
Procedure:
⇓ P052 = 3 Function selection „Download“
⇓ P key Operating display (021).
♦ All of the parameters can now be read and changed, independently of the selected control
type etc. using a PC connected at the basic drive converter interface SST1.
⇓ P052 = 0 Function selection „Return“
⇓ P key
⇓ After return, the SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) or READY TO SWITCH-ON (009) is displayed.

8-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Start-up functions

8.1.3 Hardware configuration(P052 = 4)

Function: It is used to define option boards (SCB, TSY, CB, TB) in the electronics box of the drive converter.
Condition: The „hardware configuration“ is possible in the FAULT (007), SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) or
READY TO SWITCH-ON (009) status.
Further, the bus coupling LBA (Local Bus Adapter) is required for the electronics box!
+ Chapter „Options“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 1
Result: All parameters, which can be written into the „hardware configuration“ status („H“, + righthand
column in the „parameter list“, Chapter 11), can be changed.
Procedure:
⇓ P052 = 4 Function selection „Hardware-configuration“
⇓ P051 = 3 Access stage Expert mode ( to change the following parameters)
⇓ P090 = Board, slot 2 (To the RIGHT in the electronics box!!)
P091 = Board, slot 3 (To the CENTER in the electronics box!!)
Parameter values for P090/P091:
0: No option board
1: CB Communications board
2: TB Technology board (only P090)
3: SCB Serial communications board
4: TSY Digital tachometer and synchronization board

Slots in the electronics box Boards

Left Slot 1 (CU) CU
Center Slot 3 (options) CB1 / SCB1 / SCB2 / (TSY, not for TB)
Right Slots 2 (options) CB1 / SCB1 / SCB2 / TSY / TB

NOTE
♦ Only one of each option board type may inserted in the electronics box.
♦ Technology boards (e.g. T300) must always be inserted at slot 2. When a TB board is used, a TSY
board my not be inserted.
♦ If only one option board is used it must always be inserted at slot 2.
♦ Order numbers for option boards and their descriptions, are provided in the Chapter „Options“ in the
Operating Instructions, Part 1.

⇓ Additional parameters, depending on the option boards

(+ associated Operating Instructions and parameter list, Chapter 11)
⇓ Select one of the following:
⇓ P052 = 5 Function selection „drive setting“ (+ Section 8.1.4)
or ⇓ P052 = 0 return
⇓ P key ♦ The operational display (r000) appears during which parameters and internal quantities are
re-assigned depending on the function selection.
♦ The hardware is initialized.
If a fault message F050/F070/F080 appears, + Chapter 12 „Fault and alarm messages“.
⇓ After the selected function has been completed, the SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) or READY TO SWITCH-
ON (009) display appears.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 8-5

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Start-up functions 08.96

8.1.4 Drive setting (P052 = 5)

Function: It is used to change the drive setting (drive converter/motor data, system data).
Condition: The „drive setting“ is possible in the FAULT (007), SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) or READY TO
SWITCH-ON (009) status.
Result: ♦ All parameters, which can be written in the „drive setting“ status („A“, + righthand column in the
parameter list, Chapter 11) can be changed.
♦ After the drive setting has been completed, it can be decided as to whether the „automatic
parameterization“ (P052 = 6) or „motor identification at standstill“ (P052 = 7) functions should
be executed, or if the status (P052 = 0) is just reset with a calculation of the internal quantities.
♦ If fault F061 occurs when exiting the drive setting, the parameter number, which caused the
fault, can be read in fault value r949.
Procedure:
⇓ P052 = 5 Function selection „drive setting“
⇓ P051 = 3 Access stage „expert mode“ (if parameters are to be changed, which require the expert
mode)
⇓ Change the selected parameters, which can be written into the drive setting status.
⇓ Make a selection between the following:
either ⇓ P052 = 6 Function selection „automatic parameterization“ (+ Section 8.1.5)
or ⇓ P052 = 7 Function selection „motor identification at standstill“ (+ Section 8.1.6)
oder ⇓ P052 = 0 Function selection „return“
⇓ P key The operating display (r000) appears while parameters and internal quantities are re-assigned
depending on the particular function selection.
⇓ After the selected function has been completed, the SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) or READY TO SWITCH-
ON (009) function is displayed.

8.1.5 Automatic parameterization (P052 = 6)

Function: It is used to pre-assign open-loop/closed-loop control parameters, dependent on the selected drive
setting (drive converter- and motor data) and open-loop/closed-loop control type (P163).
Condition: „Automatic parameterization“ can only be selected from the „drive setting“ status (P052=5).
Result: Only the parameters of the currently selected motor data set MDS can be pre-assigned!
Procedure:
⇓ P052 = 5 Function selection „drive setting“
⇓ P051 = 3 Access stage „expert mode“ (if parameters are to be changed, which require the expert
mode)
⇓ P052 = 6 Function selection „automatic parameterization“
⇓ P key The operating display appears, while the following parameters are re-assigned:
If parameter P103 (no-load motor current) has the value 0.0%, the rated magnetizing current is
calculated, and can be subsequently read via r196. Otherwise, the value is retained.

8-6 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Start-up functions

P169 Boost end frequency

P170 Field weakening frequency
P172 IxR compensation Kp
P173 Imax (max. current value)
P189 Energization time
P215 Delta n(act, permissible)
P221 Smothing n/f (act)
P225 n/f controller Kp
P229 n/f controllerTn
P261 Smoothing Isq
P272 R(stator + cable)
P294 Slip compensation Kp
P299 Resonant damping Kp
P369 Restart-on-the-fly, search current
P371 De-energization time
⇓ After „automatic parameterization“ has been completed, the SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) or READY TO
SWITCH-ON (009) operating display appears.

8.1.6 Motor identification at standstill (P052 = 7)

Function: This function executes a ground-fault test, and then activates „automatic parameterization“ (+
Section 8.1.5), and then carries-out a resistance measurement to improve the control
characteristics.
In so doing, certain control parameters are re-assigned.
Condition: The „motor identification at standstill“ can be selected from the „drive setting“ (P052 = 5) or
READY TO SWITCH-ON (009).
Result: ♦ Only the parameters of the currently selected motor data set MDS are pre-assigned!
♦ The „motor identification at standstill“ can be interrupted at any time using an OFF command. In
this case, fault message F114 „measurement aborted“ is output.
♦ To display the actual measuring segment of the „motor identification at standstill“ the
visualization parameter (display parameter) r333 „measurement section“ is available.
♦ If a fault/error occurs during measurement, the test is terminated with a fault message.
The fault message (r947) is stored together with the fault value (r949) in the fault memory. The
fault cause is described in detail in the fault value. The fault messages, fault values and alarm
messages are described in Chapter 12 „Fault- and alarm messages“.

NOTE
The "motor identification at standstill" is not possible when operating the drive converter with an input voltage
range of 500 V to 575 V with sinusoidal filter (option)!

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 8-7

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Start-up functions 08.96

Procedure:
⇓ P052 = 7 Function selection, „motor identification at standstill“
⇓ P key The operating display appears:
The alarm message A078 „standstill measurement follows“ is output, and the drive converter
must be powered-up within 20 s. Otherwise, F114 fault trip „measurement aborted“ is output.
⇓ Power-up the drive converter
Alarm message A078 „standstill measurement follows“ is reset.

NOTE
The inverter is enabled, current flows through the motor and the rotor can align itself!

⇓ The operational display appears, while the following steps are automatically executed:
♦ „Automatic parameterization“ is called-up (+ Section 8.1.5).
♦ Ground-fault test:
When the drive converter is operated from a grounded line network, a ground fault in the connected
motor (including feeder cables) is identified, if the ground fault current > 5 % Îrated (drive converter).
Further, defective transistors, which are still conductive, are identified in the inverter.
The tests consists of 7 steps. No transistor is fired in the 1st step, and in additional steps, precisely
one transistor is fired.
In each step, the actual values of the output currents, phases U and W, the UCE checkback signals of
the 3 phases, the overcurrent comparator, and the overvoltage comparator monitored.
The visualization parameter r358 (ground fault test result) is available, from which the measurement
result which caused the fault, can be read-out.
Comment: The ground fault test can also be separately called-up using parameter 354 (ground-
fault test).
♦ Resistance measurement and the resulting parameter change:
The resistance measurement defines the total resistance P272 (consisting of the motor stator
resistance and the feeder resistance), as well as the setting of the „deadtime compensation“.
The measurement consists of 5 measuring segments.
The deadtime compensation is determined in measuring segments 1 and 2.
Measurements in measurement segments 3 to 5 is realized using a constant DC current with a
magnitude of the peak value of the rated motor current (≤ rated drive converter output current) at
different pulse frequencies.
Two resistance values are calculated in each of the three measuring segments. An average value,
which is limited to max. 49.9 % is generated from these 6 individual results.
Measured/calculated parameter values:
P272R (stator + cable)
“deadtime compensation“
⇓ The READY TO SWITCH-ON (009) operating display appears after the selected function has been
completed.

8-8 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Functions (software)

9 Functions (software)

9.1 WEA (automatic restart)

Description:
The automatic restart function can be used for automatic fault acknowledgement and automatic power-up after
a power failure (F008 „DC link undervoltage“) as well as to permanently activate the restart-on-the-fly function
without operating personnel having to intervene.

For fault message F008 „DC link undervoltage“ (power failure): + Section 12 „Fault and Alarm Messages“
Parameter to set the automatic restart function:
P366 WEA selection i001: MDS1 0 to 3
i002: MDS2
P366 = 0 (inhibited):
WEA is inhibited.

P366 = 1 (power failure acknowlegement after the power returns):

Fault message F008 „DC link undervoltage“(power failure) is acknowledged, if this did not occur for an
OFF- or INCHING command for motor identification MOTID.
The converter is not automatically switched-in by the WEA.

P366 = 2 (Drive restart after the power returns):

Fault message F008 „DC link undervoltage“ (power failure), is acknowledged, if this did not occur for an
OFF or inching command or for motor identification MOTID.
If it has been acknowledged, a delay time P367 in (s), which can be parameterized has to expire in the
status SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008), until the drive is automatically restarted by WEA.
If the restart-on-the-fly function is activated via control word bit 23 (Section 5.1), delay time P367 is
ignored.
The unit is only switched-in again if the ON command (control word bit 0) is still present after the power
returns.
Thus, the WEA function is not possible with a parameterized ON command (control word bit 0) via
PMU or OP1!

P366 = 3 (drive is always powered-up with automatic restart-on-the-fly circuit):

As for P366 = 2, however, the restart-on-the-fly function is always activated, independent of control word
bit 23 (Section 5.1).
Delay time (P367) is ignored.
The restart-on-the fly function is activated each time the drive is powered-up, even if the power had not
previously failed!
A description of the additionally necessary settings for the restart-on-the-fly function is provided in Section
„Restart-on-the-fly“.

P367 WEA delay time i001: MDS1 0 s to 650 s

i002: MDS2
Delay time between the supply return and when the drive converter is restarted with the WEA function
activated.
The delay time is not effective for P366 = 3 or when control word bit 23 is set.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 9-1

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Functions (software) 08.96

Alarm A065 (Automatic restart function active):

• The alarm is set by WEA after switch-on, and is reset after precharging has been completed.
• When the drive is started by he WEA, the pre-charging time is not monitored, so that fault F002 „DC link
precharging fault“ can not occur.
• The converter can be manually shutdown with an OFF command during this switch-on phase.
+ Chapter 12 „Fault and Alarm Messages“.

Special cases:
♦ If the conveter has an external auxiliary supply, a fault is acknowledged and the drive re-started although
the supply is still faulted, dependent on parameter P366!
Alarm A065 „automatic restart active“ is continuously present until the supply returns!
♦ If additional faults/errors have simultaneously occurred in addition to fault message F008 „DC link
undervoltage“ (power failure), these are also acknowledged, dependent on parameter P366 !
♦ If the kinetic buffering function is also activated, when the power fails, this is first executed, before fault
trip F008 occurs and the WEA intervenes.

WARNING
During power failures and activated WEA (P366 = 2, 3), the converter can automatically
restart when the supply returns and after delay time P367 has expired (not valid when the
restart-on-the-fly function is activated).
Thus, the drive could be at a standstill for a longer period of time which could be
accidentally mistaken for being switched-off.
If the drive area is approached when in this status, severe bodily injury or material damage
could occur.

NOTE
If the restart-on-the-fly function is not activated, and P366 = 2, overcurrent trip F011 could occur or the motor
could be suddenly braked, when the converter is restarted and the motor is still rotating !
Thus, delay time P367 must be selected high enough, so that it is guaranteed that the motor comes to a
standstill before the switch-on command!

9-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Functions (software)

9.2 KIP (Kinetic buffering)

Description:

The KIP function allows brief power supply failures to be buffered by utilizing the kinetic energy, i.e. inertia of
the connected load.

In this case, the frequency is controlled (closed-loop), so that the system losses are covered by the over-
synchronous motor operation.

As the losses remain during the power PID - CONTROLLER

failure, the converter output frequency has to f (KIP contr.)
be lower. The thus reduced speed reduction + r385 for P163 = 0, 1, 2
must be taken into account. V d K IP -O N
I (KIP contr.)
-
r385 for P163 = 3, 4, 5
When the supply returns, power is fed in P 381 K ip controller
from the supply, and the converter output dynam ics (V P ), (T I), (T D )
frequency returns to the selected reference DC link voltage
voltage (Vd act)
frequency via a ramp-function generator r006, r303
function (RFG).
Fig. 9.1 Kinetic buffering
As long as the KIP function is switched-in,
the „KIP active“ signal is set via status word
bit 15 (+ Section 5.2).

Parameter to set the kinetic buffering function:

P379 KIP on/off i001: MDS1 0 to 3

i002: MDS2
0: Kinetic buffering is not enabled.
1: Kinetic buffering is enabled.
2: Flexible response is enabled with V/f = const.
3: Flexible response is enabled with f = const

P380 KIP initiation point i001: MDS1 65 % to 115 %

i002: MDS2
The kinetic buffering threshold can be set between 65 % and 115 % using this parameter.
The switch-off threshold is 5 % above the switch-on threshold (+ Chapter 10 „Function diagrams“).

NOTE
For kinetic buffering, values for P380 > 90 % are only practical, if an active front end (AFE) is used as
rectifier/regenerative feedback unit.

P381 KIP controller dynamic i001: MDS1 0 % to 200 %

i002: MDS2
The characteristics of the PIB controller can be influenced using this parameter.
The factory setting is 50 %. At 0 %, the kinetic buffering function is disabled.
The controller output can be visualized via parameter r385.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 9-3

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Functions (software) 08.96

Vd Supply failure

Vd rated = 1,315 x P071

Vd rated 100%

Vd stall -off
5%
Vd stall-on P380

Supply returns
61%
Fault message F008
(DC link undervoltage)

KIP "ON" KIP "OFF" t

Fig. 9.2 Switch-on/switch-off threshold

Vd KIP ON = P380 × Vd rated Pre-assign: P380 = 76 %

Vd KIP-OFF = (P380 + 5 %) × Vd rated Pre-assign: bei P380 = 76 % ⇒ 81 %
Vd rated = 1,315 × P071

9.3 Flexible response

Description: PID controller

The „flexible response“ function allows the f (FLN controller)

V d FLN-ON r385
converter to still operate during supply dips up to a + −
minimum DC link voltage of 50% of the rated
value. The maximum converter output is P381 FLN controller
decreased corresponding to the actual line supply r006, r303 dynamic performance (KP, Tn, Tv)
D C link voltage
voltage. If the „flexible response“ function is (V d act)
enabled, the firing level is limited to the range of
the asynchronous vector modulation (reduction of Fig. 9.3 Flexible response
the max. output voltage).

NOTE
The maximum firing level can be taken from parameter r180. The maximum output voltage at the particular
operating point can be read-out at parameter r181.

The „FLR active“ signal is set via the status word bit 15, (+ Section 5.2) as long as the „flexible
response“ function is active.

9-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Functions (software)

Conditions:
♦ A line commutating reactor von 4 % must be provided.
♦ The electronics power supply must be realized using an external 24 V supply at connector X9 (+ Chapter
"Connecting-up" in the Operating Instructions, Part 1).
♦ It must be ensured, that if there is an external main contactor, this does not drop-out during the supply
dip.
♦ When the line voltage supply returns, it is not permissible that the voltage increases 50% to 100% in less
than 5 ms.
♦ A maximum of 10 dips/hour are permissible with a minimum 10 s time between them.

WARNING
If these conditions/instructions are not observed, this can result in erronous
function or the drive converter being destroyed.

During a supply dip, the available induction motor output is reduced over-proportionally for operation with
one of the V/f operating modes (P163 = 0,1,2)

Parameter to set the flexible response function:

P379 FLR on/off i001: MDS1 0 to 3

i002: MDS2
0: Flexible response is not enabled.
1: Kinetic buffering is enabled.
2: Flexible response is enabled with V/f = const.
3: Flexible response is enabled with f = const. (only for v/f operation P163 = 0, 1, 2).

P380 FLR initiation point i001: MDS1 65 % to 115 %

i002: MDS2
The FLN threshold can be set to between 65% and 115% using this parameter.
The switch-off threshold is 5% above the switch-on threshold (+ Section 10 „Function diagrams“).

NOTE
For flexible response, values of P380 > 90 % are not practical, as otherwise the function may not be able
to be switched-out. When using an active front end (AFE) as rectifier/regenerative feedback unit, the FLN
function is automatically included in the AFE.

P381 FLN controller dynamic i001: MDS1 0 % to 200 %

performance i002: MDS2
The characteristics of the PID controller can be changed using this parameter.
The FLN controller is only enabled for P379 = 2.
The controller ensures that the v/f ratio remains constant. For supply dips/interruptions (power outages),
the drive converter output frequency and therefore the motor speed can decrease.
The factory setting is 50 %.
The controller output can be visualized via parameter r385.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 9-5

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Functions (software) 08.96

P387 FLN Vdmin i001: MDS1 50 % to 76 %

i002: MDS2
Using this parameter, the voltage threshold of the fault message F008 (DC link undervoltage) can be
reduced from 76 % (factory setting!) to 50 % (+ Section 10 „Function diagrams“).

P189 Energization time i001: MDS1 0.01 s to 10.00 s

i002: MDS2
If field weakening is reached during voltage dips, then, for V/Hz open-loop control types (P163 = 0, 1, 2),
when the voltage returns, the output voltage is ramped-up which corresponds to twice the excitation time.
The excitation time is calculated during automatic parameterization (P052 = 6) and motor identification
(P052 = 7, 8).

Ud
200 ms

Vd rated 100%
V d FLN -O FF
V d FLN -ON P380 5%

V d m in P387
F ault m essage F008 (undervoltage condition in the D C link )

FLN "ON" F LN "O F F " t

Vd FLN ON = P380 × Vd rated Pre-assigned: P380 = 76 %

Vd FLN OFF = (P380 + 5 % ) × Vd rated Pre-assigned: for P380 = 76 % ⇒ 81 %
Vd min = P387 × Vd rated
Vd rated = 1.315 × P071

Fig. 9.4 Flexible response

9-6 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Functions (software)

9.4 Vdmax closed-loop control

Description:
The Vdmax closed-loop control PID CONTR.
function allows briefly occurring
regenerative loading to be handled
Vdmax ON +
without the unit shutting down with f (Vdmax contr.)
fault F006 (DC link overvoltage). In - r385
this case, the frequency is controled
(closed-loop), so that the motor P 378 Vdm ax.controller
does not excessively enter over- DC link dynam ics (V P , T I , T D )
voltage (Vd act)
synchronous operation.
r006, r303
For a steady-state load, the
Fig. 9.5 Vdmax closed-loop control
converter output frequency must
increase. If a regenerative load
excists for too long, the unit is
shutdown with F006 when the maximum frequency is reached (P452, P453). If regenerative loading occurs
when the machine is decelerating too quickly (P464), then this is automatically reduced, so that the converter is
operated at the voltage limit.
The Vdmax control is also optimally suited for regenerative operation, which can occur when the speed
stabilizes at the end of ramp-up.

Parameters to set the Vdmax closed-loop control:

P377 Vdmax controller on/off i001: MDS1 0 to 1

i002: MDS2
0: The Vdmax controller is inhibited.
1: The Vdmax controller is enabled.

P378 Dynamic performance of the i001: MDS1 0 % to 200 %

Vdmax controller i002: MDS2
The characteristics of the PID controller can be influenced using this parameter.
For 0 %, the Vdmax controller is disabled.
The factory setting is 50 %.
The controller output can be visualized via parameter r385.

Alarm A041 „Vdmax controller inhibited“:

The line supply voltage is too high or the drive converter supply voltage (P071) is incorrectly parameterized.
The Vdmax controller is inhibited in spite of the fact that the parameter is enabled (P377 = 1), as otherwise,
the motor would immediately accelerate to the maximum frequency in operation.
The response threshold when inhibiting the Vdmax controller is calculated as follows:

V = 119 % × 2 × Vsupply, rated = 168 % Vsupply, rated

d max - ON

Vsupply, rated = P071 for AC - AC drive converters and

P071
Vsupply, rated = for DC - AC drive converters
1.315

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 9-7

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Functions (software) 08.96

9.5 DC current brake

Description:
The DC brake function allows the drive to be brought to a standstill in the shortest possible time. To realize
this, a DC current is impressed in the motor windings, which, for an induction motor, results in a very high
braking torque.

NOTE
The „DC current braking“ function is only practical for induction motors!
With the „DC current braking“ function, the kinetic energy of the motor is converted into heat in the motor.
The drive could overheat if it remains in this status for an excessive period of time!

Parameters to adjust the DC current brake:

P371 Motor de-energization time i001: MDS1 0,01 s to 10,00 s
i002: MDS2
The minimum delay time between pulse inhibit and pulse enable is set using the parameter. Thus, it should
be ensured that the motor is at least de-magnetized to 90% when the pulses are enabled.
The parameter is pre-assigned during automatic parameterization and motor identification.

P372 DC brake on/off i001: MDS1 0 to 1

i002: MDS2
0: DC brake on/off.
1: The DC brake is not activated for an OFF3 command (fast stop), the unit is DC current braked.

P373 DC braking current i001: MDS1 20 % to 400 %

i002: MDS2
The current setpoint (as a %, referred to the rated motor current) is set using this parameter, which is
impressed for DC current braking

P374 DC braking duration i001: MDS1 0.1 s to 99.9 s

i002: MDS2
The DC current braking duration is selected using this parameter.

P375 Frequency at the start of DC i001: MDS1 0.1 Hz to 300.0 Hz

braking i002: MDS2
For an OFF3 command, DC current braking is realized from this frequency.

Procedure:
f* "OFF3"
♦ The DC brake is activated using the OFF3 command.
♦ The drive converter decelerates along the parameterized OFF3
ramp (P466) down to the frequency for the start of DC braking P375
P371
(P375). Thus, the motor kinetic energy can be reduced without
endangering the drive. However, if the OFF3 ramp-down time t
(P466) is selected to be too low, there is a potential danger that a
fault could occur due to DC link overvoltage (F006).
III* III
♦ The inverter pulses are inhibited for the duration of the de- P373
energization time (P371).
♦ The required current (P373) is then impressed for the selected t
braking duration (P374). P374

♦ The drive converter changes into the SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) Fig. 9.6 DC current braking
or READY TO SWITCH-ON (009) status.

9-8 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Functions (software)

9.6 Restart-on-the-fly
Description:
The restart-on-the-fly function allows the converter to be connected to a motor which is still rotating. If the
converter was to be switched-on without the restart-on-the-fly function, an overcurrent condition would occur,
as the flux in the motor has to first be built-up, and the open-loop/closed-loop control must be appropriately
set.

NOTE
It is not possible to implement a restart-on-the-fly function for multi-motor drives, as the motors have
different run-down characteristics!

The following is executed, depending on whether a tachometer is enabled:

Restart-on-the-fly without tachometer (with search) (P208 = 0):

NOTE
„Restart-on-the-fly without tachometer“ (searching) is only practical for induction motors!
For „restart-on-the-fly without tachometer“, the „Standstill test“ generates a braking torque which can
cause drives with low moments of inertia to be braked to a standstill.

♦ A standstill test (a DC current is briefly impressed) is executed after the de-energization time (P371) has
expired after the supply returns, with WEA (+ Section 9.1) active, or since the last shutdown time with
„OFF 2“ command (inverter inhibit).
♦ If it is identified that the motor is at standstill, energization and acceleration are started as for a standard
start
♦ If motor standstill has not been identified, searching is started with the maximum frequency, clockwise
phase sequence (P452); if only a COUNTER-CLOCKWISE phase sequence is selected (+ Section 5.1
„Control word“), searching starts with the maximum frequency, clockwise rotating phase sequence
(P453).
♦ The search frequency is linearly reduced down to 0 Hz, and more specifically by the search speed which
can be parameterized P370 (in Hz, referred to 1 second). In this case the search current P369, which can
be parameterized, is impressed.
The setpoint output voltage of the drive converter, required for the search current, is compared with the
voltage value of the V/f characteristic corresponding to the search frequency. If the motor frequency is
found using this evaluation, the search frequency is kept constant and the output voltage is changed to
the voltage value of the V/f characteristic with the energization time constant (dependent on the
energization time (P189)).
The ramp-function generator is then set to the search frequency.
If it is not possible to set the ramp-function generator, as the supplementary setpoint is too high, then the
unit is shutdown with Fault F018 „ramp-function generator could not be set at restart on the fly“.
Otherwise the RESTART-ON-THE-FLY status (013) is exited and the motor (via the ramp-function
generator) is ramped up to the actual setpoint frequency.
♦ If the motor was not found, at 0 Hz search frequency, a standstill test is again executed and a search run
made in the appropriate direction of rotation when the phase sequence in the other direction of rotation is
enabled. The motor is switched-in at 0 Hz even if the search was not successful.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 9-9

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Functions (software) 08.96

Example: Restart-on-the-fly without tachometer (search)

f

fMAX(RDF)
P452 Ref. freq.

Search Acceleration
P369,P370

t
Excitation

Standstill test
De-energization time
P371
(conditional)

Fig. 9.7 Restart-on-the-fly

Restart-on-the-fly with tachometer (P208 ≠ 0):

♦ After the de-energization time (P371) expires after the supply returns with activated WEA (Section
4.3.10.1), or since the last shutdown with „OFF2“ command (inverter inhibit), the converter output voltage
is linearly increased from 0 to the V/f characteristic value (detemined from the measured, smooth speed
actual value), within the excitation time P189).
♦ After the energization time (P189 has expired, the ramp-function generator is set to the smoothed speed
actual value.
If it is not possible to set the ramp-function generator, because the supplementary setpoint is too high,
then the unit is shutdown with Fault F018 „ramp-function generator was not able to be set for restart-on-
the-fly“.
♦ Otherwise, RESTART-ON-THE-FLY status (013) is exited, and the motor is ramp-up to the actual
setpoint frequency (via the ramp-function generator.
♦ For closed-loop torque control (P163 = 5) or a slave drive (refer to P587), the drive continues with the
actual torque setpoint

Parameter to select the restart-on-the-fly function:

P583 Restart-on-the-fly enable i001: BASIC 0 to 1
Control i002: RES
word bit 23
0: Restart-on-the-fly is not enabled.
1: Restart-on-the-fly is enabled at each on command.
Source selection parameter for control word bit: P583
+ Section 5.1 „Control word“.
Exception: P366 = 3
The automatic restart (+ Section 9.1) and restart-on-the-fly (without taking into account the control
word command „restart-on-the-fly enable“ (bit 23)) functions are always activated.

Only for restart-on-the-fly without tachometer (with search) (P208 = 0):

P369 Restart-on-the-fly search i001: MDS1 10 % to 400 %
current i002: MDS2
Setpoint of the impressed current when searching for the motor (as a %, referred to the rated motor current
(P102))
Presetting during „automatic parameterization“ to „no-load motor current“ (r196)

9-10 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Functions (software)

P370 Restart-on-the-fly search i001: MDS1 0.1 Hz to 100.0 Hz

speed i002: MDS2
Ramp gradient with which the search frequency can be changed (in Hz, referred to 1 second).

As long as the restart-on-the-fly function is active, the „restart-on-the-fly active“ message is set via the
status word bit 16 (+ Section 5.2).

WARNING
With the „restart-on-the-fly without tachometer“ activated (P366 = 3 with WEA or
control word bit 23), the drive may suddenly accelerate as a result of the search
current in spite of the fact that the drive is at a standstill and a 0 Hz setpoint !
Death, severe bodily injury or material damage can occur if the drive area is
entered!

9.7 Technology controller

Description:
The technology controller function can be used for simple, higher-level closed-loop control functions without
requiring an additional technology board (TB)
A freely connectable setpoint is compared with a freely connectable actual value, and the output is tracked
via a parameterizable controller characteristic.
The technology controller sampling time is 8×P308 (pre-setting, 16 ms).
The technology controller computes in the PZD notation, i.e. 100 % corresponds to 4000H.
The function diagram of the technology controller is provided is Section 10.

Parameters to set the technology controller:

♦ Enable:
P584 Source, technology controller i001: BASIC 0 to 4505
Control enable i002: RES
word bit 24
Value 0: Technology controller is not enabled
Value 1: Technology controller is enabled, if P526 or P531 ≠ 0
additional possible settings, + Section 5.1

♦ Technological setpoint:
P525 Fixed technological setpoint i001: BASIC –200 % to 200 %
i002: RES
This value is active for P526 = 1001

P526 Technological setpoint source i001: GRD 0 to 4545

i002: RES
Source of the technological setpoint (possible settings, refer to Section 5.3)

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 9-11

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Functions (software) 08.96

P527 Technological setpoint gain i001: BASIC –300 % to 300 %

i002: RES
Is not valid for technological controller setpoint input via a fixed setpoint (P526 = 1001)

P528 Setpoint smoothing 0.00 s to 600.00 s

Smoothing time constant of the setpoint (to prevent setpoint steps)

r529 Actual technological setpoint

Visualization parameter for the actual technological setpoint in %.

♦ Technological actual value:

P530 Technological actual value i001: Value 1 0 to 999
i002: Value 2
Internal sources for the technological actual values. The parameter number of the internal drive
converter quantity is specified here, which is to be used as technological actual value.

P531 Source, technological actual i001: BASIC 0 to 4545

value i002: RES
P531 = 1100: Internal technological actual value 1 (= contents of P530.1)
P531 = 1200: Internal technlogical actual value 2 (= contents of P530.2)
Additional possible settings, refer to Section 5.3

P532 Gain, technological actual i001: BASIC -300 % to 300 %

value i002: RES
Gain of the technology controller actual value

r534 Actual technological actual value

Visualization parameter for the actual technological actual value in %.

♦ Setpoint/actual value comparison:

A binary status bit is generated from the comparison between the technological setpoint and the
technological actual value; this can be visualized in status word 2, bit 27.
The status „connection“ is realized via parameter P627.

Technological setpoint, positive Technological setpoint, negative

HIGH Techn. actual value > technological setpoint Techn. actual value < technological setpoint
LOW Techn actual value < techn. setpoint − Techn. actual value > techn. setpoint +
hysteresis (P535) hysteresis (P535)

P535 Hysteresis of the comparison 0.0 % to 100.0 %

Hysteresis for the „technological setpoint reached“ message.
The hysteresis is only effective if the message is withdrawn.

r536 Technological controller error signal

Control error signal at the input of the technological controller in %.

9-12 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Functions (software)

♦ PI controller:
Depending on the particular application, the controller can be operated as a pure PC controller or as PI
controller.
The controller is active, if the inverter pulses are enabled, the energization time (P189) has expired, and
the technological controller has been enabled (control word bit 24=1, „connection“ via P584).
P537 Technological controller gain (P component) 0.00 to 250.00

P538 Technological controller integral action time (I component) 0.00 s to 600.00 s

The I component can be disabled using the value „0“.

r540 Technological controller output signal

Output signal of the technological controller before the limit value stage in %.

P541 Technological controller limit 1 -200.000 % to 200.000 %

Upper limit of the controller output signals.

P542 Technological controller limit 2 -200.000 % to 200.000 %

Lower limit of the controller output signal.

r545 Limited technological controller output signal

Output signal of the technological controller after the limit value stage in %.
If limiting is active, the I component of the PI controller is held, in order to permit that the controller
quickly leaves the limit.

The technology controller output can then be connected with value 1020 to parameters P428
(S.suppl.setpoint) and P443 (S.main setpoint).

Additional applications of the technology controller:

1. Using parameters P526 and r529 as well as P531 and r534, process data can be transferred from analog
inputs or serial interfaces to supplementary boards.

Example:

Setpoints for a technological board are to entered in word 05 and word 06 via SST1. In order to permit
this, the parameterization must be as follows:
P526.1 = 2005 (word 05 from SST1)
P527.1 = 100.00 % (no gain)
P528 = 0.0 s (no smoothing)
P531.1 = 2006 (word 06 from SST1)
P532.1 = 100.00 % (no gain)
P694.2 = 529 (the actual value W02 for TB is thus word 05 from SST1)
P694.3 = 534 (actual value W03 for TB is thus word 06 from SST1)
The technological controller must not be activated for this function (P584 = 0).

2. Status bit 27 can be used as any comparitor, by entering a comparison value via parameters P525 and
P526, and a comparison quantitiy via P530 and P531.
The technological controller does not have to be activated for this function (P584 = 0).

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 9-13

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
 V is u a liz ation p a ra m e te r
08.96

A c tu a l M DS : r1 52
S o u rc e M DS : P 5 78 10

Fig. 10.1
S pe e d a cu al v a lu e
P2 08
< 2 mA:
AI -C o nf ig. F0 3 7 "F au lt an alo g inp ut "

Analog input
W ire b rea k sign a l
M DS 2 P 65 0.1
O ff s et
1
A na log in pu t 1 H ard w a re- S oftw a re- P 65 2 .1 4

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10
s m o o th in g ADC sm o ot hin g 1 2,5 % [2 .1/ 1]
3 2 + 4 m A to + 2 0 m A P W E [% ] = × (A E [m A ] - 4 m A + O ff s e t [m A ])
V o lt ag e in p u t mA [4 .2 ]
n 0 V to +1 0 V 10 %
o r c u rren t 2 1 P W E [% ] = × (A E [V ] + O ff s e t [V ]) 1
o u tp ut 0 m A to + 2 0 m A V
0.5 m s # 3 ms
10 %
1 0 -10 V t o + 10 V PW E [% ] = × (AE [ V] + O ffs et [V ] )
V

0 1 0 0 % = R at ed s y s te m fre q u en c y (P4 2 0 )

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions

Sp e ed a cu al v alu e
P2 08
< 2 mA:
AI-C o n fig . F0 3 7 " Fau lt an alo g in p ut "
W ire b re a k s ign a l
M DS 2 P 65 0. 2
O ff s e t
1
Function diagrams

An alo g in pu t 2 H a rd wa re - S of tw a re - P 65 2 .2 4
s m o o th ing ADC s m o o thing
1 2, 5 % [2 .1 / 1]
3 2 + 4 m A to + 2 0 m A PW E [% ] = × (A E [m A ] - 4 m A + O ffs et [m A])
mA [4 .2 ]
Vo lta g e in pu t n 0 V t o + 10 V 10 %
o r cu rre nt 2 1 P W E [% ] = × (AE [ V] + O ffs et [V ] ) 2
0 m A to + 20 m A V
o ut pu t 0 .5 m s # 3 ms
10 %
1 0 -1 0 V to + 1 0 V P W E [% ] = × (AE [V] + O f fs et [ V ] )
V

0 1 0 0 % = R at ed s y s te m fre q u en c y (P4 2 0 )

P 21 0

MD S 2
1 [3 .1/ 1]
N o rm 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
S IE M E N S A G S IM O V E R T M A S TER D R IVES FC A na log inpu t Fu nction d iag ram , Sh eet 1

10-1
Function diagrams
 P5 74 P573 P4 26 V is ualiz at ion parameter P 30 8, r72 5

10-2
A c tual S DS : r410
RES

Fig. 10.2
S top 0 B S IC / R ES : r012
0 BSIC SDS 2
R ais e 0 1 1 S ourc e SD S : P5 76
Low er 1 0 c alc .
S top 1 1 m ot or pot.
0
Function diagrams

T sa m p = 4 xP3 08
P 425, P427

Main s etpo in t
P443 P444 P445 P 455, P457
Kp

Setpoint channel, Part 1

RES P572 P 571 P 564
0 0000 BS IC P 56 8 P 45 2 SDS 2
1 00 1 RES r451 1
1002 P 448 r46 0
0 0 0 B SIC RE S
[1/9] 1 A I1 1 00 3 r447 R ES 0 1
2 A I2 1004 -1 1 0 1 BSIC
1 BSIC 4
[ 1/ 9] T.reg.-o ut pu t 102 0 1 1 0
S S T1 2002 to 2016 0 [2.2/1]
C B/ TB 30 02 to 30 16 P 4 53 0
S CB 1 wit h SC I 1 (S la v e 1 ) 4101 to 4103
S C B 1 w it h SC I 1 (S lav e 2) 42 01 to 4203 A 035
S CB 1/ SC B 2 (P ee r t o pe er) 4501 to 4505
S CB 2 (U S S ) 4502 to 4516

A d dit io nal s et point

P 428 P 429
Kp
RES
0 00 00 BSIC P 56 8
1001 P 432
[1/ 9] 1 A I1 1003 0
2 A I2 1004 r431
RES
[1/9] T.reg. -output 1020
SS T1 2 00 2 to 2016 1 1 BSIC
C B/ TB 3002 to 3016
5
0 0
SC B 1 w ith S C I 1 (Slav e 1) 4 10 1 to 41 03 [2.2/1]
S C B 1 w ith S C I 1 (S lav e 2) 4201 to 4203
S C B1 /S CB 2 (P eer to peer) 45 01 to 45 05
S C B 2 (U S S ) 4502 to 4516

Fix ed s etpoint s P 581 P5 80

SDS 2
1 R ES
P 421 FS P 1 0 0 B SIC
P 42 2 FSP 2 0 1
P 423 FS P 3 1 0
P 42 4 FSP 4 1 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SIEM EN S AG S IM O V E R T M A S T E R D R IV E S F C S etpoint channel P art 1 F unction diagram , S heet 2.1

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10
08.96
 V isua liz ation pa ra m et er P 308,r725
08.96

A ctua l M DS : r1 52
P 47 6

Fig. 10.3
A c t ual S D S: r41 0
B SI C / R ES : r0 12
r552-13
S ourc e MD S : P 578
S ourc e SD S : P 576
+ − Ts am p = 4xP 308
On ly ef fect iv e f or a nalog s et po int in puts
P 468, P 470 fo r m ain- o r additional se tp oin t (P 443 , P4 28 )

P 462, P 467 P 46 4, P 516

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10
SDS 2 r461
P466
1

Setpoint channel, Part 2

P5 14 P 562 P 614
r460 P 452 P olarity n/ fset
[2. 1/ 9] r480 r481 r48 2 r48 2
RES ev aluat ion
4 R am p-func tion 1 BSIC
generator 6
(R FG ) 0
P 563 [ 3. 1/ 1]
0 [3 . 2/ 1]
P4 53 P 51 7 P51 8
[ 3. 3/ 1]

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions

r218 P6 08
n /f (ac t )
+
11
−
[ 3. 1/ 3]
[3.2/ 3]
[3.3/ 3] P452, P 453

P 51 9
M DS 2 P 618
1

r552-4
[2.1/ 9]
5 1 P 5 16
O FF1
0 or O FF3
P 514
0 SD S 2
1
& Firin g pulse in hibit

P 51 3
P5 12 P 61 0
+

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SIEM ENS A G S IM O V E R T M A S T E R D R IV E S F C S etpoint channel P art 2 F u nction d iagram , S hee t 2.2

10-3
Function diagrams
 P 52 0 P 299 n(m ax )+ r150-4
c ontrol res erv e

10-4
r297
Kp (headroom )

Fig. 10.4
+ fS
P 517 M DS 2 A0 42 F015 M DS 2 r301
1 1
P 5 18 r150-15 −
Re s onant
r150-7
S tall damp ing
r150-8 P 302
Function diagrams

diagnos t ic s
r178 Vd V d,sm ooth
r218 f (P R T ,F LR ,Vd max -R eg.) P 1 01 P 169 P1 07
r30 3, r006 MDS 2 r304 r181
Ts a m p = 8 xP3 08 r385 P 170, r182 1
[ 5/ 3]
MDS 2
n/f set 13 P 16 5 1
r482 V
[ 2. 2/ 9] parab . Ts am p = Tpuls
− 1
6 P 763 ,P 769
+ − 0 f r00 3 r180
I-/ V-B oos t
P 167 P 168 MDS 2
Speed enc oder 1 1
P 209 ,P 210,P 652 V Vd-c orrec t
P 21 5 0
P2 08 A 04 3 P 22 1 r22 2 r224 P 225 P 229 linear and
F0 53 v olt. lim it A
[1/ 9] MDS 2 Kp Tn P 166
4 1 M DS 2 f Ts am p = Tpuls
MD S 2 MDS 2 P 272

V/Hz control + n closed loop control (P163 = 0)

3 AA II 12 3 P lau- 1
1 + 1 r764
PG (K S) 2 s ibilit y
PG 1 tes t S of t s t art s elec t
without 0 −
M DS 2
Ts am p = P 308 r21 4 n-c ont roller r296 P 189 P1 90 1 r003
Ts a m p = 4 xP3 08 Ou tp ut vo lt ag e
P 261 P172 r0 04
100 %
1 O utput c urrent
11 r218 P 109 r219 Kp t 0
r264 n/f ac tual r263 r005
[2.2/6] M DS 2 MDS 2
v alue 100% O utpu t pow er
MDS 2 1 1
i L1
1 r006
C urren t 0 D C -link v oltage
i L3 r00 4
c o mputer lx R -c om pens ation r0 08

r005 r179 Therm . m otor utiliz ation

PW I abs. val. r010
P 175 P 17 6
i²t c onv erter C on ve rt er ut iliz at ion
Kp Tn r17 7 r1 78
r174 MD S 2
Im ax . 89% -136%
− 1
P1 73 P 308,r725
+
Ac c el. c urren t
P171 C urrent lim iting
1 Vis ualiz ation param e ter
0 A c tual MDS : r152
0
B SIC / R E S : r012
S ourc e M D S : P 578 Ts am p = 2 xP 308
R am p -up

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SIEM EN S A G S IM O V E R T M A S TE R D R IV E S F C V /H z contr. + n cl.-loop contr. P 163=0 F unction diagram ,S heet 3.1

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10
08.96
 P52 0 P 299 n(m ax )+ r150-4
c ontrol res erv e
08.96

r297
A 042 Kp (headroom)

Fig. 10.5
F0 15 +
P5 17 MDS 2 r1 50-1 5 MDS 2 r301 fS
1 1
P 518 −
S tall Re so nant
r178
diag nos t ics dam ping
r218 P 302

Ts am p = 8x P 308 Vd V d,sm ooth

f (P R T ,F LR ,V dma x- R eg.) P 101 P 169 P 107
r303,r006 MDS 2 r304 r181
r385 P 17 0, r18 2 1
[ 5/ 3]
MDS 2
n/f set 13 1
P16 5

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10
r482 V
[ 2. 2/9] parab. Ts am p = T puls

V/Hz control (P163 = 1)

− 1
6 P 763 , P769
+ − 0 f r00 3 r18 0
I-/V B oos t
P 167 P 16 8
MDS 2
1 1
V V d-c orrec t
0
linear and
v olt. lim it A

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions

P 166
f Ts am p = Tpuls
P 294 P 272
r764
Kp
11 r218 P 109 r219 S oft s tart s elec t
MDS 2
n/f ac tual 1 MD S 2
[2. 2/ 6] v alue
P 189 P 190 1 r003
O utpu t vo ltage

P 261 P 172 r004

S lip r29 6 100%
1 O utp ut c urrent
c om pe ns at ion Kp t
Ts am p = 4x P 308 0 r00 5
r264 MDS 2 r263 MDS 2 100% O ut put pow er
MDS 2 1 1
iL1
1 r006
C urrent 0 D C link v olt age
i L3
c om puter lxR -co mp ens atio n
r004 r0 08

r005 r179 Therm . m ot or utiliz ation

PW I abs. va l. r010
P 17 5 P 176
i²t c on ve rte r C onv ert er ut iliz a tion
Kp Tn r177 r178
r174 MDS 2
Im ax . 89% -136%
− 1
P173 P 308, r725
+
Ac cel. current
P 171 C urren t limit in g
1 V is ualiz ation param eter
0 A c tual M D S: r152
0
B SI C / R E S : r012
S ourc e MD S : P578 Ts am p = 2x P 30 8
R am p-up

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SIEM EN S A G S IM O V E R T M A S T E R D R IV E S F C V /H z control P 163 = 1 F unction diagram , S heet 3.2

10-5
Function diagrams
 n(ma x)+ r15 0-4

10-6
c ontro l res erve r29 7
(h ea droom )

Fig. 10.6
+ fS
−

P30 2
Function diagrams

Vd V d, sm ooth
f (P R T ,F LR ,V dm ax-R e g.) P 10 1 P 169 P 107 r303,r006 r3 04 r18 1
M DS 2,3 ,4
r385 P 170,r182 1
[5/3]
MDS 2
n /f set 13 1
P 165 V
r48 2
[2.2/9] p arab. T sa mp = Tpu ls
− 1
6 P 763, P769
+ 0 f r003 r180

V/Hz control textile (P163 = 2)

I-/V B oos t
P 167 P168
MDS 2
1 1
V V d-c o rrec t
0
line ar an d
11 r218 P 10 9 r219
v olt. lim it A
n/f ac t ual P 16 6
[2. 2/ 6] f
v alue Ts am p = Tpuls
P 272
r76 4
So ft s tart se lec t
MDS 2
P 189 P 190 1 r0 03
O utput v oltage
P 261 P 172 r004
100%
1 O utput cu rrent
Kp t 0
r26 4 r263 r005
MDS 2 MDS 2,3,4
1 00% Ou tp ut pow er
M DS 2 1 1
iL1
1 r0 06
C urrent 0 D C link v oltage
iL3 r004
c om pu te r
lx R -c om pens ation r008

r00 5 r17 9 T he rm. mo to r u tiliz ation

PW I abs. val . r010
P 17 5 P 176
i²t c onv erter C onv ert er utiliz ation
Kp Tn
r1 74 MDS 2 r178
Im ax . 89 % -13 6%
− 1
P 173 P 30 8, r7 25
+
A c c el. c urrent
P 171 Current limit ing
1 V is ua liz ation para m et er
0 A ct ua l M D S: r15 2
0
B SI C / R E S : r012
S ourc e M D S : P 578 Ts am p = 2x P 308
R am p-up

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SIEM ENS A G S IM O V E R T M A S T E R DR IV E S F C V /H z control textile P 163 = 2 F unction diagram , S heet 3.3

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10
08.96
 P 308, r725
08.96

Fig. 10.7
Vis ualiz at io n param ete r
B SI C / R E S : r012

Ts am p = 8x P 3 08
c ontrol w ord b it 24 c ontrol w ord bit 24
(c on nec t ion P 584) (c onnec t ion P 584)
Se tpoint puls e enable puls e enable
P526 P 527 end of energiz . t ime end of energiz . t ime
Kp

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10
RE S R ES

Technology controller
0 0000 BSIC
BS IC
P525 fix ed s etpoint 1001 Sm oo th ing Se tpoin t
P5 28 r52 9
[1/9] 1 A I1 1003
[1/9] 2 A I2 100 4 0
S S T1 2002 to 2016
C B /TB 30 02 t o 3016 1
SC B 1 w it h SC I 1 (Slav e 1) 4101 to 4 103

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions

S CB 1 w it h SC I 1 (Sla ve 2 ) 4201 to 4203
SC B 1/ SC B2 (P eer to peer) 45 01 t o 4 505
S CB 2 (U S S ) 4502 to 4 516
r5 36 P 537
r540 P 541 r54 5
Kp

Is tw ert
+
P 531 P 532 Tec hnology
Kp − c ont roller output
RES P 538
0 0000 BSIC P5 42
A c tual Tn
[1/ 9] 1 AI 1 100 3 v alue H y s t eres is
[1/ 9] 2 AI 2 1004 r534 P535
P aram eter 1 1100
c ontents P5 30 .x a ct . va lue 2
120 0
S S T1 2002 to 2016
C B /TB 30 02 t o 3016
S CB 1 w it h SC I 1 (Slav e 1) 4101 to 4 103
SC B 1 w ith SC I 1 (Slav e 2) 4201 to 4203
r553-2 7
S CB 1/S C B 2 (Peer t opeer) 45 01 t o 4 50 5
S CB 2 (U S S ) 4502 to 4516

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SIEM EN S A G S IM O V E R T M A S T E R D R IV E S F C T echnolo gy controller F unction diagram , S he et 4

10-7
Function diagrams
 10-8
Fig. 10.8
P 3 77 ,P 37 8
Function diagrams

M DS 2
1
U dm a x -
re gulator
r385
f ( PR T ,F LR ,V dm ax-R eg.)
P 189,P 379,P 380, P381,P 387 13 [3.1/4] [3.2/4] [ 3.3/2]

r303 M DS 2 P 615

Freely-connectable functions
Po wer 1
ride t hru
(PR T )

P 379,P 380, P381

M DS 2
Flex 1
R es pons e
(FLR)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SIEM EN S AG S IM O V E R T M A S T E R D R IV E S F C F re ely-connectable functions F unction diagram , S h eet 5

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10
08.96
08.96 Parameter list

11 Parameter list
General Observation Parameters up to 49 Analog Input/Output from 650
General Parameters from 50 Communications from 680
Drive Data from 70 Diagnosis from 720
Hardware Configuration from 89 Modulator from 760
Motor Data from 100 Factory Parameters from 780
Control from 150 Special Parameters from 800
Functions from 220 Profile Parameters from 900
Setpoint Channel from 410 Tech Board Parameters from 1000
Control and Status Word from 550

Explanations on the Parameter List

Example:

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P999 Parameter Name in OP1 -300.00 to 300.00 2 25)/ BR4)
*1) Description [Hz] i001=50.00 25)/ BR4)
3E7Hex i002=50.00

SDS(2)-Parameter6) or:

Type=I2; 2) PKW: 1Hex=0.01Hz; Process Data Group.: 03) ←7)

1) Confirmation Parameter: not active before pressing the P -key
2) Parameter Type
O2 16 Bit Value without sign
I2 16 Bit Value with sign
L2 Nibble coded Quantity
V2 Bit coded Quantity
3) Normalization Group for Process Data (PcD)
Process Data Group Process Data Normalization
0 as Parameter Value Normalization
1 4000Hex = P420 Rated System Frequency
2 1000Hex = P102 Rated Motor Amps
3 1000Hex = P101 Rated Motor Volts
4 1000Hex = r307 Line Volts (AC)
4) Drive status:
U MLFB Input
H Hardware Configuration
A Hardware Setting
B Ready (Including Fault)
R (Run) Operation (including Fly Restart, Power Ride Thru)
5) Access Level which is minimum needed to display or change a Parameter
1 Operation
2 Standard Mode
3 Expert Mode
6) Abbreviations for Index Parameters
SDS(2) Setpoint Channel Data Set Parameter with 2 Indices, to be changed via Control Word 2, Bit 16
MDS(2) Motor Data Set Parameter with 2 Indices, to be changed via Control Word 2, Bit 18
B/R Parameter which can be changed between Base and Reserve setting via Control Word 2, Bit 30
7) Parameter value is pre-assigned after initialization dependent on the MLFB drive converter.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-1

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

11.1 General Observation Parameters

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_
[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
r000 Operation Display - 1 /UHABR
Displays Drive Status, Fault Messages and Warnings;
Description, refer to Section 6 operator control „Operator control“ in the
Operating Instructions, Part 2.
r001 Drive Status - 2 /UHABR
Displays the actual drive status
1Hex Parameter Values:
0 = Drive MLFB input MLFB Input
1 = Drive initialization Drive Init
2 = Hardware initialization H/W Init
3 = Drive system initialization System Init
4 = Hardware settings H/W Setting
5 = Drive system settings System Set.
6 = Selection on several drive test functions Test
7 = Fault Fault
8 = Restart inhibition ON locked
9 = Ready for turn-ON Rdy ON
10 = Pre-charging of the DC link bus Precharging
11 = Ready for operation Rdy Operat.
12 = Ground fault test Grd Flt TST
13 = Flying Restart is active Fly Restart
14 = Drive is operating Operation
15 = Ramp generator decelerating (OFF1) OFF 1
16 = Quick Stop (OFF3) OFF 2
17 = DC braking DC Brake
18 = Motor data identification (standstill test) Mot ID Stop
19 = Speed controller optimization n Reg Opt.
20 = Synchronization active Synchronize
21 = Download of parameter settings Download
Analog Output: 100% Parameter Value=16384
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r003 Output Volts - 2 / BR
Drive output voltage (Fundamental rms) [V]
3Hex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=4*P101
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1V PcD Gr.: 3
r004 Output Amps - 2 / BR
Drive output current (Fundamental rms) [A]
4Hex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=4*P102
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1A PcD Gr.: 2
r005 Output Power - 2 / BR
Output active power (calculated value) in % of rated motor power [%]
5Hex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=400.0%
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1% PcD: 4000HEX=400%
r006 DC Bus Volts - 2 / BR
DC Bus voltage (actual value to be displayed on PMU and OP) [V]
6Hex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=4*r307
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0V PcD Gr.: 4
r008 Motor Utilizat. - 2 / BR
Thermal motor utilization (calculated value) [%]
8Hex ATTENTION: for an overload protection of the motor which is derived from
this parameter sufficient cooling of the motor must be
guaranteed.
Condition: P363 >= 100 s
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=16384%
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0% PcD Gr.: 0

11-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
r010 Drive Utilizat. - 2 / BR
Drive utilization [%]
AHex Thermal drive utilization as a result of an i2t calculation of the output current.
Maximum load of the drive will have the following reaction:
• after 30 sec. a warning message (P622) and
• after 60 sec. a reduction of the output current to 91% of the rated drive
current.
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=16384%
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0% PcD Gr.: 0
r012 Base / Reserve 0 to 1 2 / BR
Base / reserve settings of the process data wiring for setpoint signals and for
CHex control word bits
Parameter values:
0: Base setting Base
1: Reserve setting Reserve
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=16384
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r013 Operat. Hours 3 2 / BR
Operation hours with released inverter pulses (drive status 'operation').
DHex Indices:
i001 = Days: days (0...9999)
i002 = Hour:hours (0...24)
i003 = Sec: seconds (0...3600)
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-3

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

11.2 General Parameters

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_
[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P050 Language 0 to 5 - 2 /UHABR
* Display language on the optional operation panel OP and in the PC software 0 2 /UHABR
32Hex SIMOVIS
Parameter values:
0: Deutsch Deutsch
1: English English
2: Espanol Espanol
3: Francais Francais
4: Italiano Italiano
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P051 Access Level 1 to 3 - 1 /UHABR
* Setting of access levels; with higher access levels more parameters can be 2 1 /UHABR
33Hex read and/or written.
Parameter values:
1: Operating via PMU or OP with motor operated potentiometer function Operation
2: Standard mode Standard
3: Expert mode Expert
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P052 Function Select 0 to 7 - 2 /UHABR
* Selection of several commissioning steps and special functions. 0 2 /UHAB
34Hex Parameter values:
0 = Return into the former drive status from one of the further described Return
functions.
1 = Parameter-Reset: all parameters are reset to their original settings Par. Reset
(factory settings).
According to the Profibus profile for variable speed drives this function is
also accessible via parameter P970. After finishing this function the
parameter is automatically reset to 0.
2 = Release for MLFB setting (changing into the drive status 'Drive MLFB Set MLFB
input'). To exit this function the parameter must be reset to 0.
3 = Download/Upread (Changing into the drive status 'Download'). To exit Download
this function the parameter must be reset to 0.
4 = Hardware configuration (Changing into the drive status 'Hardware H/W Setting
settings'). To exit this function the parameter must be reset to 0.
5 = Drive system settings (Changing into the drive status 'Drive system System Set.
settings' to parameterize the motor data). To exit this function without
internal parameter adaptions, P052 must again be set to 0 (reset). If the
motor data or pulse frequency were changed, the function should be
exited with P052 = 6, 7 or 8.
6 = Automatic parameterization: sets the control system parameters based Auto Param.
on the motor name plate data and the gating unit configuration (e.g. P761,
pulse frequency). Automatic parameter setting (parameterization) can
only be called-up from the drive setting (P052 = 5).
7 = Motor data identification at standstill: sets the control system parameters Mot ID Stop
(except speed controller) based on measured motor data; this function
contains ground fault test and function #6.
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -

11-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P053 Parameter Access 0 to 31 - 1 /UHABR
* Release of interfaces for parameterization. 6 1 /UHABR
35Hex At any time all interfaces have write access to this parameter.
Parameter values:
0: none
1: COM BOARD (CB)
2: BASE KEYPAD (PMU)
4: BASE SERIAL (SST1) (SST1)
8: Serial I/O (SCB with USS) (SCB)
16: TECH BOARD (TB)
Description for Setting:
• Every interface is coded by a number.
• Input of the number or the total of several numbers which are related to
interfaces, gives parameterization access to these interfaces.
Example:
The factory setting '6' means, that BASE KEYPAD (PMU) and BASE
SERIAL (SST1) have parameterization access.
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P054 OP Backlight 0 to 1 - 3 / BR
Backlight for the optional operation panel OP 0 3 / BR
36Hex Parameter values:
0 = Backlight always ON always ON
1 = Backlight only ON during operation dur.operat.
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-5

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

11.3 Drive Data

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_
[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P070 MLFB (6SE70..) 0 to 117 - 3 /U BR
* MLFB (model number) of the base drive 0 3 /U
46Hex Parameter values:
see section „Initialization“ in the Operating Insructions, Part 2
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P071 Line Volts 90.0 to 1320.0 - 2 / ABR
Line voltage of the drive [V] ← 2/ A
47Hex Rated voltage of the feeding AC or DC mains; this parameter is used to
calculate the rated DC bus voltage as a basis for the voltage limits of the
Vd(max) and the Vd(min) [Power ride thru] controller (e. g. undervoltage
failure limit).
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1V PcD Gr.: 0
P072 Rtd Drive Amps 4.5 to 6540.0 - 2 /U ABR
Rated drive output current [A] ← 4 /U
48Hex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1A PcD Gr.: 0
P073 Rtd Drive Power 2.2 to 1800.0 - 3 /U BR
Rated drive output power [kW] ← 4 /U
49Hex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1kW PcD Gr.: 0
P077 FactSettingType 0 to 3 − 3 /U BR
* Selective factory setting. − 0 3 /U
4DHex The parameter can be changed in the status „MLFB input“ (P052 = 2). If an
MLFB still hasn’t been entered, after the MLFB number has been entered and
the „MLFB input“ has been left (P052 = 0) then the selected factory setting-
type is immediately valid.
A selective factory setting can be executed via „Par. reset“ (P052 = 1 or
P970 = 0). This parameter value is not changed.
Parameter values:
0: Factory setting as before. Normal
1: With this setting, with respect to 0, the following parameters are initialized OP1
differently:
P554, P568, P571, P572, P573, P574
2: With this setting, with respect to 0, the following parameters are initialized OP1 cabinet unit
differently:
P554, P568, P571, P572, P573, P574, P575, P588
3: With this setting, with respect to 0, the following parameters are initialized Cabinet terminal
differently:
P554, P565, P575, P588
Type:O2; PKW: 1 HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
r089 Board Position 1 0 to 3 3/ B
PCB in position #1 (left) of the electronic box
59Hex
Parameter Values: 0 = none none
1 = SIMOVERT FC CU Board FC
2 = SIMOVERT VC CU Board VC
3 = SIMOVERT SC CU Board SC
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0

11-6 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

11.4 Hardware Configuration

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_
[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P090 Board Position 2 0 to 4 - 3 / H BR
* PCB in position #2 (right) of the electronic box 0 3/H
5AHex
Parameter values:
0 = no optional PCBs none
1 = CB Communication Board CB
2 = TB Technology Board TB
3 = SCB Serial Communication Board SCB
4 = TSY Digital-Tacho and Synchronization Board TSY
Description for Setting:
Only the following combinations of PCBs and positions are admitted:
Position #3 (P091) Position #2 (P090)
- CB
- TB
- SCB
- TSY
SCB CB
CB TB
SCB TB
CB SCB
CB TSY
TSY CB
SCB TSY
TSY SCB
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P091 Board Position 3 0 to 4 - 3 / H BR
* PCB in position #3 (center) of the electronic box 0 3/H
5BHex Description see P090
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P092 Output Filter 0 to 2 - 3 / ABR
Defines connected Output Filter 0 3/ A
5CHex Parameter values: 0 = no output filter none
1 = sine wave output filter sine wave
2 = dV/dt filter dV/dt
Value '1' limits the depth of modulation to the range of space vector
modulation (see also P763, maximum depth of modulation). After leaving drive
settings (see P052 = 5) the pulse frequency (P761) is adapted to the sine
wave filter requirements.
Notes:
• For closed-loop speed/frequency/torque control, the sinusoidal filter for
the drive converter is taken into account.
• Parameter value 2 limits the adjustable pulse frequency P761 to 3 kHz.
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-7

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

11.5 Motor Data

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_
[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P100 Type of Motor 0 to 1 2 2 / ABR
Changes between international (IEC) and US (NEMA) motor data i001=0 2/ A
64Hex parameterization modes. Input data are i002=0
for IEC motors: power factor cos(PHI)
for NEMA motors: efficiency and rated motor power
Parameter values: 0: IEC IEC
1: NEMA NEMA
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P101 Motor Rtd Volts 115.0 to 1600.0 2 2 / ABR
* Rated motor voltage [V] ← 2/ A
65Hex Name plate value of the rated motor voltage; the valid kind of connection (star
/ delta) must be regarded.
Input for Siemosyn motors is the rated voltage at rated motor frequency.
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1V PcD Gr.: -
P102 Motor Rtd Amps 0.6 to 3000.0 2 2 / ABR
Rated motor current; name plate value for the valid kind of connection (star / [A] ← 2/ A
66Hex delta.
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1A PcD Gr.:0
P103 Mot No Load Amps 0.0 to 95.0 2 3 / ABR
* Motor no load current (rated magnetizing current, data sheet value) in % of [%] i001=0.0 3/ A
67Hex rated motor Amps. i002=0.0
A correct input improves the calculation of motor data and results in a more
accurate active current calculation.
Pre-set during automatic parameterization (P052 = 7)
Note: for 0 % < P103 < 10 % the value of P196 is set to 10 %.
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1% PcD: 4000HEX=400%
P104 MotPwrFactor 0.500 to 0.999 2 2 / ABR
* Power factor cos(PHI) of the motor (name plate value) ← 2/ A
68Hex Condition: P100 = 0 (IEC-Motor)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.001 PcD: 4000HEX=0.25
P105 Motor Rtd Power 0.1 to 2000.0 2 2 / ABR
* Rated motor power (name plate value) [hp] ← 2/ A
69Hex Condition: P100 = 1 (NEMA-Motor)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1hp PcD Gr.: 0
P106 Motor Rtd Effic. 50.0 to 99.9 2 2 / ABR
* Rated motor efficiency (name plate value) [%] ← 2/ A
6AHex Condition: P100 = 1 (NEMA-Motor)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1% PcD: 4000HEX=25%

11-8 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P107 Motor Rtd Freq 8.0 to 300.0 2 2 / ABR
Rated motor frequency [Hz] i001=50.0 2/ A
6BHex Name plate value of the rated synchronous frequency of the motor. i002=50.0
ATTENTION: Changing this parameter may also change the pulse
frequency (P761).
Notes:
• For P163 = 0, 1 (V/Hz control and V/Hz control with speed control):
maximum value is 200 Hz
• For P163 = 2 (Textile applications): maximum value is 300Hz
The pole pair number (P109) is calculated when parameters are changed
For induction motors, a slip (r295) must exist to P108 * P109/60, if the slip
compensation function is to operate correctly.
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P108 Motor Rtd Speed 0 to 18000 2 2 / ABR
* Rated motor speed (name plate value) [min-1] i001=0 2/ A
6CHex Note: P163 = 0 (V/Hz control with speed control) is only available with this i002=0
information
The pole pair number (P109) is calculated when parameters are changed
For induction motors, a slip (r295) must exist to P107/ P109*60, if the slip
compensation function is to operate correctly.
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0min-1 PcD Gr.: 0
P109 Motor #PolePairs 1 to 10 2 3 / ABR
* Number of motor pole pairs (calculated from rated frequency (P107) and ← 3/ A
6DHex rated motor speed (P108)); may be checked and - if needed - corrected.
ATTENTION: As the pole pair number is automatically calculated when
entering the rated motor frequency and speed (P107, P108), it
is always necessary to check P109.
P109 must be written into when downloading (P052 = 3)
For motors with rated data for regenerative operation, the auto-
matically calculated pole pair number must be increased by 1.
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-9

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

11.6 Control
PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_
[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
r150 Control Status - 3 / BR
Status word of the control circuit
96Hex Parameter values:
Bit00 = 1: Ramp generator set command is active
Bit01 = 1: Drive is operated in field weakening mode
Bit02 = 1: Ud(min) controller is active (power ride thru)
Bit03 = 1: Ud(max) controller is active
Bit04 = 1: Frequency limitation is active
Bit05 = 0: Ramp generator: acceleration lock is active
Bit06 = 0: Ramp generator: deceleration lock is active
Bit07 = 1: Speed controller output at upper limit
Bit08 = 1: Speed controller output at lower limit
Bit09 = 1: Ramp generator in protective mode
Bit10 = 1: i(max) controller active
Bit11 = 1: Initialization of the control circuit is finished
Bit12 = 1: Speed controller: Output set command is active
Bit13 = not used
Bit14 = not used
Bit15 = 1: Motor pulled out or blocked
Coding of bits on the PMU display:
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0

Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0

r152 act. MotDataSet − 3 / ABR
Displays the active motor data set
98Hex Parameter values: 0: motor data set 1 MotDataSet1
1: motor data set 2 MotDataSet2
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD-Gr.: 0
P163 Control Mode 0 to 2 2 3 / ABR
Parameter values: i001=1 3/ A
A3Hex 0: V/Hz control with superposed speed control V/Hz+ nReg i002=1
1: V/Hz control V/Hz
2: V/Hz control for textile applications; allows no frequency corrections V/Hz Textil
e. g. by the current limitation controller
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P165 V/Hz Mode 0 to 1 2 2 / ABR
V/Hz mode i001=0 2/ A
A5Hex Parameter values: 0: linear characteristic (for constant torque drives) linear i002=0
1: parabolic characteristic (for pumps, fans, etc.) parabolic
See section „V/Hz mode“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P166 Boost Mode 0 to 1 2 2 / BR
Boost mode at f = 0 Hz i001=1 2/ B
A6Hex Parameter values: i002=1
0: Current boost: a voltage boost is calculated by means of a starting current Curr.Boost
(P167) allowing for the measured stator resistance.
1: Voltage boost: the voltage boost of the V/Hz curve is directly entered via Volt.Boost
P168.
See section „V/Hz mode“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -

11-10 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P167 Boost Amps 10.0 to 400.0 2 2 / BR
Current boost in % of rated motor current [%] i001=100.0 2 / BR
A7Hex is the basis for the voltage boost at f = 0 Hz, allowing for the measured stator i002=100.0
resistance.
See section „V/Hz mode“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2
Condition: P166 = 0 (Current boost)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1% PcD: 4000HEX=400%
P168 Boost Volts 0.00 to 25.00 2 2 / BR
Voltage boost at f = 0 in % of rated motor voltage (P101) [%] i001=2.00 2 / BR
A8Hex The value is pre-assigned for automatic parameter setting (P052 = 6, 7) i002=2.00
See section „V/Hz mode“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2
Condition: P166 = 1 (Voltage boost)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01% PcD: 4000HEX=400%
P169 Boost End Freq 0.0 to 300.0 2 2 / BR
End frequency of voltage boost [Hz] i001=10.0 2 / BR
A9Hex In the range from 0 Hz to the end frequency the voltage boost is reduced to 0. i002=10.0
Special case:
A value of 0 Hz causes the output voltage to stay constant until crossing the
normal V/Hz curve ('horizontal boost').
The value is pre-set during automatic parameterization (P052 = 6, 7).
See section „V/Hz mode“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P170 Field Weak Freq 8.0 to 300.0 2 2 / BR
Start frequency for field weakening [Hz] i001=50.0 2/ B
AAHex At higher frequencies the output voltage is kept constant. If the voltage limit is i002=50.0
reached below this value, field weakening starts at a lower frequency.
See section „V/Hz mode“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2
Note: r182 (real frequency at start of field weakening)
The maximum value is limited to 2 * P107 (rated motor frequency).
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P171 Accel Amps 0.0 to 799.9 2 3 / BR
Additional acceleration current in % of rated motor current [%] i001=0.0 3 / BR
ABHex Additional current setpoint signal for high acceleration torque at low speed. i002=0.0
The acceleration current is only active during acceleration and up to the end
frequency (P169) of the voltage boost. It may be used to generate a break off
torque.
See section „V/Hz mode“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2
MDS(2) Parameter
yp=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1% PcD: 4000HEX=400%
P172 IxR Compens Gain 0.00 to 40.00 2 2 / BR
Compensation of voltage drops on long motor cables in % of the rated motor [%] i001=0.00 2 / BR
ACHex impedance. Depending on the actual torque generating current component i002=0.00
the output voltage is increased .
See section „V/Hz mode“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01% PcD: 4000HEX=25%

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-11

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P173 Imax 0.1 to 3000.0 2 2 / BR
Maximum current (Fundamental rms) [A] ← 2 / BR
ADHex Setpoint signal for the current limit (Imax controller) to protect the motor and
the drive, respectively.
Setting range: 0.125 to 4.00*rated motor current (P102),
but maximum 1,36* rated drive current (P072).
After the automatic parameterization (P052 = 6, 7) the parameter is pre-set to
1,5 * rated motor current (P102). Reaction (derating) may result from the
pulse frequency parameter (P761).
Related display parameter:
r174: realized maximum current setpoint signal; allows for other influences
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1A PcD Gr.: 2
r174 Imax(set) - 3 / BR
Maximum current (realized setpoint signal) for the Imax controller [A]
AEHex allows for the influences of the I2t calculation and the acceleration
current (P171)
Dependent Parameter: P173 (maximum current, parameterized value)
MDS(2) Parameter
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=4*P102
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1A PcD Gr.: 2
P175 Imax Reg. Gain 0.01 to 0.49 2 3 / BR
Gain of the current limiting PI controller (Imax controller). i001=0.05 3 / BR
AFHex The parameter is pre-set during automatic parameterization (P052 = 6). i002=0.05
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01 PcD: 4000HEX=0.25
P176 Imax Reg. Time 4 to 32001 2 3 / BR
Integral time constant of the current limiting PI controller (Imax controller). [ms] i001=100 3 / BR
B0Hex MDS(2) Parameter i002=100
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0ms PcD Gr.: 0
r177 f(Imax-Reg.) - 3 / BR
Frequency output of the Imax controller. [Hz]
B1Hex The sign depends of the sign of the torque generating current component.
Note: P163 = 0, 1 (V/Hz modes except textile applications)
Analog Output: 100 % @ Parameter Value=163.84Hz
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1Hz PcD Gr.: 1
r178 V(Imax-Reg.) - 3 / BR
Output voltage of the Imax controller to reduce the drive setpoint voltage. [V]
B2Hex Notes:
P163 = 0, 1 (V/Hz modes except textile applications):
Only active, when the stator frequency setpoint signal is less than the
rated slip frequency (r295).
P163 = 2 (Textile applications):
Active in the complete frequency range but no frequency correction
(r177).
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=4*P101
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1V PcD Gr.: 3
r179 Output Amps(rms) - 3 / BR
Output current (fundamental rms); fast actual value for automation purposes. [A]
B3Hex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=4*P102
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1A PcD Gr.: 2

11-12 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
r180 Mod Depth Limit - 3 / BR
The modulation depth limit is mainly influenced by the modulator, it is always [%]
B4Hex equal or less than the value of P763 (e. g. when a sine wave filter is present
(P091 = 1) or when edge modulation is off (P769 > 0))
Note:
The maximum possible control limit (approx. 93 %) of the gating unit at
frequencies less than 28 Hz, is only taken into account in r181.
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=400%
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1% PcD: 4000HEX=400%
r181 Max Output Volts - 3 / BR
Maximum possible output voltage; calculated of the maximum depth of [V]
B5Hex modulation (r180) and the actual value of the DC bus voltage (r304).
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=4*P101
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1V PcD Gr.: 3
r182 FieldWeakFrq-act - 3 / BR
Frequency at start of field weakening; compared to P170 the available voltage [Hz]
B6Hex headroom is allowed for. In combination with the actual value of the frequency
(r297) this parameter is used to calculate a field weakening curve for the
adaptation of the slip in the field weakening range.
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=163.84Hz
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P189 Excitation Time 0.01 to 10.00 2 3 / BR
Motor excitation time [s] i001=1.00 3 / BR
BDHex Wait time between pulse release and ramp generator release. Within this i002=1.00
period the magnetization of the induction motor is built up.
The value is pre-set during automatic parameterization (P052 = 6, 7).
Notes:
• The magnetization is built up at a frequency of 0 Hz with the selected
V/Hz curve voltage (see P167 and P168, respectively)
• If smooth start mode (P190 = 1) is selected, the voltage is built up ramp-
like instead of step-like.
• The „restart-on-the-fly active“ status bit (refer to P616) is set during the
motor excitation time.
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01s PcD Gr.: 0
P190 Smooth Accel 0 to 1 2 3 / BR
For smooth starting, the flux in the motor is established with some delay. This i001=0 3 / BR
BEHex is to ensure, that even with residual magnetization, the motor only rotates in i002=0
the required direction of rotation.
If smooth acceleration mode is selected, at turn on the output voltage
increases ramp like to the V/Hz curve voltage within the excitation time
(P189).
Parameter values:
0 = off 0: off
1 = on 1: on
Condition: P100 = 0, 1 (motor type = IEC, NEMA)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
r196 No Load Amps - 3 / BR
Rated magnetizing current (see P103, motor no load current) [A]
C4Hex if P103 = 0.0%: r196 is automatically calculated
if 0.0% < P103 < 10.0%: r196 = 0.1 * P102 (rated motor current)
if P103 >= 10%: r196 = P103 * P102
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=4*P102
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1A PcD Gr.: 2

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-13

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
r200 Rotor Time Const - 3 / BR
Rotor time constant of the motor (calculated) [ms]
C8Hex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=16384ms
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0ms PcD Gr.: 0
P208 Src RotSpeed act 0 to 4 2 3 / ABR
* Type of tachometer and type of its connection (for speed control (P163=0) a i001=0 3/ A
D0Hex tachometer must be reported). i002=0
Parameter values:
0 = no tachometer none
1 = Encoder Encoder
2 = Encoder with control track Enc+CtTrack
3 = Analog tachometer via analog input #1 AnalogTach1
4 = Analog tachometer via analog input #2 AnalogTach2
Notes
P208 = 1, 2 (Encoder):
• The encoder evaluation requires the TSY board in position 2 or 3 (P090,
P091) of the electronic box.
• Only encoders with a phase shift of 90° between the 2 tracks can be
used.
• For settings '2' or a low level signal or disconnecting of the control track
terminal of the TSY board will cause the fault message F052 in order to
report a broken wire.
• Set P209 to the number of pulses of the encoder.
Please refer to the manual of your encoder or to the TSY manual for details.
P208 = 3, 4 (Analog tachometer):
• Scale the analog tachometer input via P210
• If the output voltage of the analog tachometer is > 10 V, the analog
tachometer interface (ATI) must be used.
Related display parameter:
r214 (Actual speed measured by the tachometer)
Conditions: P163 = 0 (V/Hz modes with speed control)
with encoder: P090, P091, TSY board
with analog tachometer: ATI board if needed
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P209 Encoder Pulse # 60 to 5000 2 3 / ABR
Number of pulses of the encoder i001=1024 3/ A
D1Hex Description for setting: i002=1024
Parameter is only needed if an encoder is reported (P208 = 1 or 2).
Related display parameter:
r214 (Actual speed measured by the tachometer)
Condition: 208 = 1, 2, 5, 6 (pulse encoder)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0

11-14 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P210 AnalogTachScale 500 to 6000 2 3 / ABR
Analog tachometer scaling [min-1] i001=3000 3 / ABR
D2Hex Speed which causes 10 V input signal at the analog input (see P208). i002=3000
The gain setting board ATI is required to connect the analog tachometer to
the drive if the tachometer voltage may exceed 10 V.
ATTENTION: The parameter value is at same time the limit of the speed
measurement range. Speed overshoots must be allowed for.
Analog tachometers can be used up to drive output frequencies
of max. 100 Hz.
Description for Setting:
Example: Maximum speed is 3000 rpm plus a 10 % overshot, an ATI board is
used
1 P210 must be set to 3300 rpm (3000 rpm + 10 %),
2 in V/Hz mode (P163 = 1) the motor must be operated at 3300 rpm (e. g.
to be measured with an external rpm meter)
ATTENTION: The analog input where the ATI board is connected to must
not be parameterized to be a setpoint input!
3. the output voltage of the ATI board, connected to the selected analog
input terminal (P208) must be adjusted to 10.00 V.
Dependent parameter:
The offset of the analog input must be adjusted (P652).
Condition: P208 = 3, 4 (analog tachometer)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0min-1 PcD Gr.: 0
r214 Meas'd Rot.Speed - 3 / BR
Actual speed value, measured via a tachometer (P208). [Hz]
D6Hex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=P420
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P215 max. dn/dt 0.1 to 199.9 2 3 / BR
Maximum allowed change of the measured speed actual value in % of rated [%] i001=10.0 3 / BR
D7Hex motor speed (P108) during one sampling period of the control system (P308). i002=10.0
The function may identify noise or interrupted speed signals e. g. caused by
defective cable shielding or tachometer coupling.
ATTENTION: This function limits the rate of change in speed of the drive. If a
warning message is reported during acceleration or at load
changes it may be needed to increase the parameter value.
Pre-set during automatic parameterization (P052 = 6, 7) .
Related display parameter: r218 (Actual speed value)
Condition: P208 <> 0 (Source of actual speed value)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1% PcD: 4000HEX=400%
r218 n/f(act) - 3 / BR
Actual value of speed / frequency [Hz]
DAHex P163 = 0 (V/Hz modes with speed control): actual speed multiplied with the
number of pole pairs of the motor (P109)
P163 = 1, 2 (V/Hz mode, V/Hz mode for textile applications) @ slip
compensation P294 = 0 %: stator frequency
P163 = 1 (V/Hz mode) and slip compensation (P294) active: actual speed
multiplied with the number of pole pairs of the motor (P109)
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=P420
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-15

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
r219 n(act) - 2 / BR
Actual speed [Hz]
DBHex P163 = 0 (V/Hz modes with speed control): actual speed of the motor
P163 = 1, 2 (V/Hz mode, V/Hz mode for textile applications) @ slip
compensation P294 = 0 %: stator frequency divided by the number of pole
pairs of the motor (P109)
P163 = 1 (V/Hz mode) and slip compensation (P294) active: actual speed
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=P420
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P221 Smooth n/f(act) 0 to 2000 2 2 / BR
Smoothing time constant of the actual n/f value for the speed controller (e. g. [ms] i001=0 2 / BR
DDHex for gear box looseness. i002=0
Related display parameter: r222 (smoothed n/f actual value)
Condition: P163 = 0 (V/Hz mode with speed control)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0ms PcD Gr.: 0
r222 n/f(act,smo'd) - 2 / BR
Smoothed n/f actual value at the input of the speed controller [Hz]
DEHex Dependent parameter: P221 (Smoothing of the n/f actual value)
Condition: P163 = 0 (V/Hz mode with speed control)
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=P420
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
r224 n/f Deviation - 3 / BR
Control deviation at the input of the speed controller. [Hz]
E0Hex Condition: P163 = 0 (V/Hz mode with speed control)
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=P420
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P225 n/f Reg. Gain 0.00 to 250.00 2 2 / BR
Proportional gain of the n/f controller. i001=3.00 2 / BR
E1Hex Pre-set during automatic parameterization (P052 = 6). i002=3.00
Condition: P163 = 0 (V/Hz mode with speed control)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01 PcD: 4000HEX=64
P229 n/f Reg Time 25 to 32001 2 2 / BR
Integral time constant of the speed controller [ms] i001=400 2 / BR
E5Hex pre-set during automatic parameterization (P052 = 6, 7). i002=400
Description for setting:
With a value of 32001 ms the integral part of the controller is turned off,
the controller operates as a P controller.
Related display parameter: r237 (integral part of the n/f controller)
Condition: P163 = 0 (V/Hz mode with speed control)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0ms PcD Gr.: 0
P261 Smooth Isq 0 to 3200 2 3 / BR
Time constant for smoothing the torque generating current component (r264). [ms] i001=2000 3 / BR
105Hex Pre-set during automatic parameterization (P052 = 6, 7). i002=2000
Related display parameter: r263 (Isq(set, smo'd))
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0ms PcD Gr.: 0

11-16 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
r263 Isq(set,smo'd) - 3 / BR
Smoothed actual value of the torque generating current component; is used [A]
107Hex for the slip compensation.
Dependent parameter: P261 (Smoothing of Isq)
Condition: P163 = 1 (V/Hz mode)
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=4*P102
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1A PcD Gr.: 2
r264 Isq(act) - 3 / BR
Actual value of the torque generating current component [A]
108Hex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=4*P102
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1A PcD Gr.: 2
P272 ResistStator+Cab 0.00 to 49.99 2 2 / BR
Total of the stator resistance of the motor and the cable resistance in % of [%] i001=3.00 2 / BR
110Hex rated motor impedance. i002=3.00
Pre-set during automatic parameterization (P052 = 6) and during motor data
identification(P052 = 7).
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01% PcD: 4000HEX=25%
P294 Slip Comp Gain 0.0 to 400.0 2 2 / BR
Proportional gain of the slip compensation (also allowing for the rotor [%] i001=0.0 2 / BR
126Hex temperature) i002=0.0
Description for Setting:
0.0%: Slip compensation off
50 - 70%: Full slip compensation at cool motor (partial load)
100%: Full slip compensation at warm motor (full load)
ATTENTION: Name plate data for rated motor current (P102), speed (P108)
and frequency (P107) must be entered correctly and
completely.
Condition: P163 = 1 (V/Hz mode)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1% PcD: 4000HEX=400%
r295 Motor Rtd Slip - 3 / BR
Rated motor slip in % of rated motor frequency (P108). [%]
127Hex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=25.0%
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01% PcD: 4000HEX=25%
r296 Slip Frequency - 3 / BR
Actual slip frequency of the motor [%]
128Hex P163 = 0 (V/Hz mode with speed control):
Output signal of the speed controller.
P163 = 1 (V/Hz mode): Output signal of the slip compensation.
Dependent parameters: P294 (Kp of the slip compensation) for
P163 = 0 V/f class
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=25.0%
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01% PcD: 4000HEX=25%
r297 f(set,stator) - 3 / BR
Stator frequency setpoint signal [Hz]
129Hex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=P420
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-17

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P299 Reson Damp Gain 0.00 to 0.99 2 3 / BR
Proportional gain of the resonance damping circuit i001=0.00 3 / BR
12BHex The resonant damping circuit is effective in a range from about 5 % to 70 % of i002=0.00
rated motor frequency.
Description for setting: Too high parameter values cause instability (forward
control effect).
Note: The resonance damping circuit damps oscillations of the active
current. These oscillationa mainly happen during no load operation.
The parameter can not be used to optimize the response behavior of
V/Hz mode with speed control (P163 = 0).
Related display parameters: r264 (Isq(act))
r301 (f (Resonance damping)).
Condition: P163 = 0, 1 (V/Hz modes except textile applications)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01 PcD Gr.: 0
r301 f(Reson Damp) - 3 / BR
Output frequency of the resonance damping circuit [Hz]
12DHex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=P420
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P302 SmoothDCBusVolts 0 to 16 2 3 / BR
Time constant for smoothing the DC link bus voltage (r304) for use in the Vd i001=9 3 / BR
12EHex correction circuit. i002=9
The smoothing is exponentially related to the parameter value.
Tsmooth ~ 2Parameter value
Related display parameter: r304 (Vd(act,smooth))
Note: if P302 = 16, P304 displays the DC bus voltage calculated from P071
(Line Voltage)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
r303 DC BusVolts(act) - 3 / BR
unfiltered actual value of the DC link bus voltage [V]
12FHex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=4*r307
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0V PcD Gr.: 4
r304 DCBusVolt(smo'd) - 3 / BR
Smoothed actual value of the DC bus voltage; smoothing see P302 [V]
130Hex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=4*r307
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1V PcD Gr.: 4
r307 Line Volts (AC) - 3 / BR
Rated line voltage [V]
133Hex For AC drives: Rated drive input voltage (P071).
For DC inverters: fictive AC input voltage which would cause the DC
P071
voltage ( ).
1,35
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=1638.4V
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1V PcD Gr.: 0
P308 Sampling Time 0.8 to 4.0 - 3 / ABR
Base sampling time T0 of the V/Hz control. [ms] 2.0 3/ A
134Hex Description for Setting:
• Before reducing the sampling time the calculation time headroom should
be checked (r725). A minimum headroom of 5 % should always be
guaranteed to prevent the operation program from a slow reaction.
• If fault message #42 'Calculation time' occurs, the sampling time must be
increased.
• The calculation time loading also depends on the pulse frequency (P761).
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1ms PcD Gr.: 0

11-18 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

11.7 Functions
PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_
[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
r333 Mot ID Status - 2 / BR
Displays the actual measuring step of the motor data identification; see also
14DHex section „Function selection“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2
The '100' digit displays the type of measurement:
0xx: not active
1xx: ground fault test
4xx: DC measurement
The '10' digit separates the measurement into several steps; the detailed
meaning depends of the '100' digit:
10x: ground fault test selected
11x: no transistor ON
12x: transistor V+ ON
13x: transistor V- ON
14x: transistor U+ ON
15x: transistor U- ON
16x: transistor W+ ON
17x: transistor W- ON
The '1' digit displays more details of the steps:
4x0: DC current measurement selected
4x1: Measurement in phase direction U
4x2: Measurement in phase direction V
4x3: Measurement in phase direction W
4x4: Parameter written into
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P354 Ground Flt Test 0 to 3 - 3 / BR
Ground fault test; this is not a protective function according to any standard. 1 3 / BR
162Hex Parameter values:
0 = no ground fault test to be performed except during parameter not active
identification
1 = ground fault test will be performed after the next ON command; next ON
afterwards the parameter is reset to '0'
2 = ground fault test to be performed after every ON command every ON
3 = ground fault test is always OFF, even during parameter identification OFF
Note: During motor data identification (P052 = 7) a ground fault test is
performed if P354 = 0, 1, or 2.
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-19

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
r358 GrdFltTestResult − 3 / BR
Results of the ground fault test
166Hex Bit-coded display of the reason which has caused the break of the test.
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0

Parameter values:
Bit 0 =1: VCE phase W
Bit 1 =1: VCE phase V
Bit 2 =1: VCE phase U
Bit 3 =1: overcurrent
Bit 8 =1: negative IW
Bit 9 =1: positive IW
Bit 10 =1: negative IU
Bit 11 =1: positive IU
ATTENTION!
The semiconductor which was triggered or where the fault occurred is
coded using Bits 12 to 14 or the highest value nibble on the OP1.
Individual converter or Inverter 1 in the parallel circuit:
3 U+ 1 V+ 5 W+
15 13 15 13 15 13
14 12 14 12 14 12
7 5 7 5 7 5
6 4 6 4 6 4

15 13 15 13 15 13
14 12 14 12 14 12
7 5 7 5 7 5
6 4 6 4 6 4
4 U − 2 V− 6 W −
Bits 12 to 14 all OFF: no semiconductor was in ON-state.
Inverter 2 in the parallel circuit:
7 all OFF A U+ 8 V+ C W+
15 13 15 13 15 13
14 12 14 12 14 12
7 5 7 5 7 5
6 4 6 4 6 4

15 13 15 13 15 13
14 12 14 12 14 12
7 5 7 5 7 5
6 4 6 4 6 4

B U − 9 V − D W −
Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P362 Motor Cooling 0 to 1 2 2 / BR
* Motor cooling i001=0 2 / BR
16AHex The kind of cooling of the motor influences the calculation of the allowed duty i002=0
cycle. Because the cooling of self cooled motors depends on the speed, the
admissible load decreases with lower speed. Motors with forced cooling don't
have these restrictions.
Parameter values: 0: self cooled self cooled
1: forced cooling forced vent
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -

11-20 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P363 Mot ThermT-Const 0 to 16000 2 2 / BR
Thermal time constant of the motor [s] i001=100 2 / BR
16BHex Description for Setting: i002=100
The i2t calculation is activated by a parameter value >= 100 sec
Example: For a 2-pole 1LA5063 motor, the value should be set to:
8 min (from the table)*60 s/min = 480 s
Typical thermal time constants for Siemens motors (in min.):
Type 2-pole 4-pole 6-pole 8-pole 10-pole 12-pole
1LA5063 8 13 - - - -
1LA5070 8 10 12 - - -
1LA5073 8 10 12 - - -
1LA5080 8 10 12 - - -
1LA5083 10 10 12 - - -
1LA5090 5 9 12 12 - -
1LA5096 6 11 12 14 - -
1LA5106 8 12 12 16 - -
1LA5107 - 12 - 16 - -
1LA5113 14 11 13 12 - -
1LA5130 11 10 13 10 - -
1LA5131 11 10 - - - -
1LA5133 - 10 14 10 - -
1LA5134 - - 16 - - -
1LA5163 15 19 20 12 - -
1LA5164 15 - - - - -
1LA5166 15 19 20 14 - -
1LA5183 25 30 - - - -
1LA5186 - 30 40 45 - -
1LA5206 30 - 45 - - -
1LA5207 30 35 45 50 - -
1LA6220 - 40 - 55 - -
1LA6223 35 40 50 55 - -
1LA6253 40 45 50 60 - -
1LA6280 40 50 55 65 - -
1LA6283 40 50 55 65 - -
1LA6310 45 55 60 75 - -
1LA6313 - 55 60 75 - -
1LA831. 35 40 45 45 50 50
1LA835. 40 45 50 50 55 55
1LA840. 45 50 55 55 60 60
1LA845. 55 55 60 60 70 70
1LL831. 25 25 30 30 35 35
1LL835. 30 30 35 35 40 40
1LL840. 35 35 35 35 40 40
1LL845. 40 35 40 40 45 45

1LA135. 30 35 40 - - -
1LA140. 35 40 45 45 - -
1LA145. 40 45 50 50 55 55
1LA150. 50 50 55 55 65 65
1LA156. 60 55 60 60 70 70
1LL135. 20 20 25 - - -
1LL140. 25 25 30 30 - -
1LL145. 30 30 30 30 35 35
1LL150. 35 30 35 35 40 40
1LL156. 40 35 35 35 40 40

Type nn= 3000 2000 1500 1000 500 1/min

1PH610. 25 25 25 20 -
1PH613. 30 30 30 30 -
1PH616. - 35 35 35 -
1PH618. 40 40 40 40 40
1PH620. 40 40 40 40 40
1PH622. 40 40 40 40 40
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0s PcD Gr.: 0
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-21
SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P364 Mot Load Limits 0 to 300 2 2 / BR
* Messages of the duty cycle monitor for the motor (in % of rated motor power) [%] i001=100 2 / BR
16CHex The parameter is valid for all motor data sets. i002=100
Index i001 = WARN: When the entered load value is reached a warning
message is edited via P625.
Index i002 = FLT: When the entered load value is reached a fault
message is edited via P626.
Description for Setting: 0: no evaluation
Related display parameter: r008 (Motor loading)
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0% PcD Gr.: 0
P366 Auto Restart 0 to 3 2 2 / BR
Auto restart after power outage i001=0 2 / BR
16EHex Parameter values: i002=0
0 = blocked none
1 = only power outage fault reset after power return (-> status Ready for Flt Reset
turn-ON)
2 = When power returns the drive turns on again after the wait time Auto Start
(P367)
3 = Immediately after power return the drive turns on and performs the Fly Auto St
function 'Flying Restart'.
Note: independently of the status of the bit 'release of Flying Restart' of the
control word the 'Flying Restart' function is active at every turn ON if
P366 = 3.
ATTENTION: it must be guaranteed by external safety means that the drive
can not start without intention at parameter settings P366 = 2, 3
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P367 AutoRestart Wait 0 to 650 2 2 / BR
Wait time between return of power and automatic drive restart if auto restart is [s] i001=0 2 / BR
16FHex on (P366=2). i002=0
Note: The wait time is not valid if the Flying Restart function is active:
(P366 = 3 (auto restart with flying restart), P583 (source for release of
flying restart) or if bit 'Flying Restart' of the control word is set).
Description for setting: the wait time should be in the range of the coasting
time of the drive system.
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0s PcD Gr.: 0
P369 Fly Search Amps 10 to 400 2 2 / BR
Search current used for flying restart if no tachometer is used in % of rated [%] i001=50 2 / BR
171Hex motor current (P102) i002=50
Conditions: P163 = 1 (V/Hz mode)
Flying restart function must be released by the control bit
(source see P583) or
flying restart function must be released via P366 = 3 (auto
restart)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0% PcD: 4000HEX=400%
P370 Fly Search Speed 0.1 to 100.0 2 2 / BR
Search speed [Hz] i001=1.0 2 / BR
172Hex Frequency range which is to be passed during flying restart within 1 sec. i002=1.0
Note: Conditions as for P369
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1Hz PcD Gr.: 1

11-22 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P371 De-magnetizeTime 0.01 to 10.00 2 2 / BR
De-excitation time of the motor [s] i001=1.00 2 / BR
173Hex Minimum wait time between pulse blocking and pulse release. The induction i002=1.00
motor de-magnetizes during this period.
Pre-set during automatic parameterization (P052 = 6, 7).
Description for setting:
About 2.3*rotor time constant (r200), but not more than 3.0 s. This setting
guarantees that the motor is de-magnetized for at least 90 % when pulses
are released.
ATTENTION: After OFF1, OFF3 and JOG commands the de-excitation
time is not active
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01s PcD Gr.: 0
P372 DC Braking 0 to 1 2 2 / BR
DC injection braking of the motor to brake a motor without optional braking i001=0 2 / BR
174Hex equipment (chopper, regenerative front end) i002=0
ATTENTION: All loss energy concentrates in the motor, the danger of a
local overheating in the motor exists!
Note: Only for induction motors
Overcurrent interventions (alarm A02) can occur for over-
dimensioned motors (P102 > P072) when starting the DC brake.
In this case, the de-energization time (P371) must be increased.
Parameter values: 0: DC injection braking OFF off
1: DC injection braking active with OFF3 command on
('quick stop').
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P373 DC Braking Amps 20 to 400 2 2 / BR
Setpoint for the DC injection braking current in % of rated motor current [%] i001=100 2 / BR
175Hex Condition: P372 = 1 (DC injection braking) i002=100
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0% PcD: 4000HEX=400%
P374 DC Braking Time 0.1 to 99.9 2 2 / BR
DC injection braking time [s] i001=5.0 2 / BR
176Hex Condition: P372 = 1 (DC injection braking) i002=5.0
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1s PcD: 4000HEX=163.84s
P375 DC Braking Freq 0.1 to 300.0 2 2 / BR
Start frequency for DC injection braking; if OFF3 command is active DC [Hz] i001=300.0 2 / BR
177Hex injection braking is performed below this frequency i002=300.0
Condition: P372 = 1 (DC injection braking)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1Hz PcD Gr.: 1

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-23

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P377 DC Bus Volts Reg 0 to 1 2 3 / BR
Limitation controller for the DC link bus voltage; limits the DC link bus voltage i001=0 3/ B
179Hex during regenerative operation (e. g. fast deceleration) to the maximum i002=0
allowed value.
Note: • This function can not replace braking or regenerating equipment
when the load actively regenerates energy!
• The Vdmax controller should be blocked when braking or
regenerating equipment is connected .
Parameter values: 0: blocked off
1: Vdmax controller released on
Dependent parameter:
P378 (Vdmax controller dynamic behavior): the Vdmax controller is OFF
at a controller dynamics setting of 0 %.
Related display parameter: r385 (Output signal of the Vdmax controller)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P378 DC Bus Volts Dyn 0 to 200 2 3 / BR
Vdmax controller dynamic behavior [%] i001=50 3 / BR
17AHex Description for setting: Vdmax controller is OFF at a 0 % setting. i002=50
Condition: P377 = 1 (Vdmax controller)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0% PcD Gr.: -
P379 PRT/FLR 0 to 3 2 3 / BR
Power ride thru (PRT) / Flexible response (FLR) i001=0 3/ B
17BHex Power ride thru: i002=0
Operation may be continued during short power outages by regenerating
energy from the load / motor to the drive. Loads with high inertia and high
speed allow longer sustaining periods.
Dependency: P381 (PRT/FLR controller speed)
Related display parameter: r385 (PRT controller output)
Flexible response:
The flexible response function allows converter operation for short power
outages. The available output power is reduced according to the actual
supply voltage and the rated converter current (P072). The firing angle
which can be realized when the function is released (P379 = 2, 3) is
limited to the vector modulation range.
Note: For the flexible response function, the electronics power supply must
be buffered using an external auxiliary power supply.
Dependent parameters: P380 (PRT/FLR LowVolts)
P381 (PRT/FLR controller speed)
P387 (FLR Vdmin)
Visualization parameter: r385 (FLR controller output)
Parameter values: 0: PRT and FLR blocked OFF
1: PRT released PwrRideThru
2: FLR released with V/f = const. FLR V/f = const.
3: FLN released with f = const. FLR f = const.
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P380 PRT/FLR LowVolts 70 to 115 2 3 / BR
Point at which the PRT control or the FLR is activated. [%] i001=76 3 / BR
17CHex DC link voltage which when fallen below, the PRT or FLR is activated i002=76
(reference quantity: rated DC link voltage; for AC drive converters P071*1.32,
for DC converters, P071).
Condition: P379 = 1 (select PRT)
or P379 = 2, 3 (select FLR)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0% PcD Gr.: -

11-24 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P381 PRT/FLR Reg Dyn 0 to 200 2 3 / BR
Controller dynamic behavior for kinetic buffering (P379 = 1) for all control [%] i001=50 3 / BR
17DHex types and flexible response (P379 = 2, V/f = const.) i002=50
A parameter value of 0% turns OFF the function.
Condition: P379 = 1 (select PRT)
or P379 = 2 (select FLR, V/f = const.)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0% PcD Gr.: -
r385 f(PRT/VdmaxReg) - 3 / BR
Output signal of the Vdmax / PRT controller; this frequency is added to the [Hz]
181Hex frequency setpoint (r482).
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=P420
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P387 FLR Vd min 50 to 76 2 3 / BR
Minimum DC link bus voltage in % of the rated DC link bus voltage (for AC [%] i001=76 3/ B
183Hex drives: P071 * 1.32, for DC inverters: P071); lower voltages trip the inverter i002=76
and an DC link bus undervoltage fault.
Condition: P379 = 2, 3 (FLR released)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0% PcD Gr.: -
P395 Selectivity 0 to 1 - 3 / BR
In configurations, where one drive is feeding a number of paralleled motors in 0 3/ B
18BHex the case of a failure (short circuit, ground fault, motor blocked) one of these
motors may be disconnected from the drive by blowing its fuses.
ATTENTION: If the selectivity function is selected, there is no protection
available against a terminal short circuit; the overcurrent
protection is still active.
Parameter values: 0: Selectivity OFF OFF
1: Selectivity ON ON
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-25

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

11.8 Setpoint Channel

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_
[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
r410 act. SetpDataSet - 3 / BR
Active setpoint channel data set
19AHex Parameter values: 0= setpoint data set 1 SDS 1
1= setpoint data set 2 SDS 2
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=16384
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P420 System Rtd Freq 1.00 to 300.00 - 2 / ABR
Rated system frequency / speed [Hz] 50.00 2 / AB
1A4Hex Reference quantity for acceleration time (P462), deceleration time (P464),
hysteresis for 'ramp generator active' message (P476), base setpoint (P445)
and for speed / frequency setpoint and actual values which are transfered via
analog inputs and outputs or serial communications.
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P421 Fixed Freq1(set) -300.00 to 300.00 2 2 / BR
By setting the correlated bits of the control word (r551) the fixed setpoint is [Hz] i001=50.00 2 / BR
1A5Hex activated from the source defined in P580 / P581. i002=50.00
SDS(2) Parameter
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P422 Fixed Freq2(set) -300.00 to 300.00 2 2 / BR
By setting the correlated bits of the control word (r551) the fixed setpoint is [Hz] i001=-50.00 2 / BR
1A6Hex activated from the source defined in P580 / P581. i002=-50.00
SDS(2) Parameter
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P423 Fixed Freq3(set) -300.00 to 300.00 2 2 / BR
By setting the correlated bits of the control word (r551) the fixed setpoint is [Hz] i001=20.00 2 / BR
1A7Hex activated from the source defined in P580 / P581. i002=20.00
SDS(2) Parameter
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P424 Fixed Freq4(set) -300.00 to 300.00 2 2 / BR
By setting the correlated bits of the control word (r551) the fixed setpoint is [Hz] i001=5.00 2 / BR
1A8Hex activated from the source defined in P580 / P581. i002=5.00
SDS(2) Parameter
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P425 MOP saving 0 to 3 - 2 / BR
Saving of the setpoint which has come from the motor operated potentiometer 0 2 / BR
1A9Hex (MOP) at turn OFF / power outage
The saved setpoint signal is active again after a new ON command
(P443 = 1002, main setpoint from MOP).
If saving of the MOP setpoint is not active (P425 = 0, 2), the MOP start
frequency (P426) is cleared after an OFF command or a power outage.
The „internal motorized potentiometer rounding-off“ (necessary to precisely
set a frequency) can be cancelled if the motorized potentiometer (MOP) is to
ramp-up extremely quickly.
Parameter values: 0: without save with ‘internal MOP rounding-off’ OFF
1: with save with ‘internal MOP rounding-off’ ON
2: without save without ‘internal MOP rounding-off’ OFF
3: with save without ‘internal MOP rounding-off’ ON
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -

11-26 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P426 MOP start frequ -300.00 to 300.00 2 3 / BR
Start frequency of the motor operated potentiometer (MOP) [Hz] i001=0.00 3 / BR
1AAHex The motorized potentiometer setpoint is set to this start frequency if storage is i002=0.00
not active (P425 = 0, 2), in the drive converter statuses, switch-on inhibit
(r001 = °008), and ready to power-up (r001 =°009).
As the motorized potentiometer setpoint can only have positive values, the
sign must be specified via the direction of rotation bits (P571, P572).
SDS(2) parameter
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P427 Set MOP 0 to 1 - 2 / BR
The motorized potentiometer is set to the absolute value of the main setpoint. 0 2 / BR
1ABHex The motorized potentiometer setpoint is set to the absolute value of the main
setpoint (r447) when changing-over the main setpoint source to a motorized
potentiometer (P443 = 1002; e.g. for basic/reserved changeover). Thus, a
continuous transition can be achieved when changing-over from automatic- to
manual operation. As the motorized potentiometer setpoint can only be
positive, the sign must be specified via the direction of rotation bits (P571,
P572).
Parameter values: 0: no storage OFF
1: with storage ON
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX = 0.01 Hz PcD Gr.:1
P428 Src Add Setpoint 0 to 4545 2 3 / BR
* Source of the additional setpoint signal. i001=0 3 / BR
1ACHex Depending on P432 the additional setpoint is added in front or behind the i002=0
ramp generator
Parameter values:
1001: Fixed setpoints (P421 to P424)
other values: according to the process data wiring of the setpoint channel
data set.
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P429 AddSetpoint Gain -300.00 to 300.00 2 3 / BR
Proportional gain of the additional setpoint [%] i001=100.00 3 / BR
1ADHex Not effective if the additional setpoint is a fixed setpoint (P428 = 1001). i002=100.00
B/R Parameter
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01% PcD Gr.: 0
r431 AddSetpoint(act) - 3 / BR
Actual additional setpoint signal [Hz]
1AFHex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=P420
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P432 AddSetpoint Dest 0 to 1 - 3 / BR
Access location of the additional setpoint signal 1 3 / BR
1B0Hex Parameter values: 0 = behind of ramp generator Bef RampGen
1 = in front of ramp generator Aft RampGen
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P443 Src MainSetpoint 0 to 4545 2 2 / BR
* Source of the (frequency / speed) main setpoint signal. i001=1002 2 / BR
1BBHex Parameter values: i002=1001
1002: Motor operated potentiometer (MOP)
other values: according to the process data wiring of the setpoint channel
data set.
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-27

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P444 GainMainSetpoint -300.00 to 300.00 2 2 / BR
Proportional gain of the main setpoint signal [%] i001=100.00 2 / BR
1BCHex Not effective if the setpoint is a fixed setpoint or comes from the MOP i002=100.00
(P443 = 1001, 1002).
B/R Parameter
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01% PcD Gr.: 0
P445 Base Setpoint -100.0 to 100.0 2 3 / BR
Base setpoint of the main setpoint channel in % of rated system frequency [%] i001=0.0 3 / BR
1BDHex (P420); is added to the main setpoint signal. i002=0.0
Not effective if the setpoint is a fixed setpoint or comes from the MOP
(P443 =1001, 1002).
B/R Parameter
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1% PcD Gr.: 0
r447 Main Setp.(act) - 2 / BR
Actual main setpoint [Hz]
1BFHex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=P420
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P448 Jog Frequency -300.00 to 300.00 - 2 / BR
Jog frequency [Hz] 5.00 2 / BR
1C0Hex Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
r451 n/f(set,total1) - 3 / BR
Frequency setpoint signal at the addition point in front of the ramp generator [Hz]
1C3Hex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=P420
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P452 Max Freq FWD 0.0 to 300.0 2 2 / ABR
Maximum frequency at forward speed [Hz] i001=55.0 2 / AB
1C4Hex Limited by: i002=55.0
• double rated motor frequency (P107)
• pulse frequency (P761)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P453 Max Freq REV -300.0 to 0.0 2 2 / ABR
Maximum frequency at reverse speed [Hz] i001=-55.0 2 / AB
1C5Hex Limited by: i002=-55.0
• double rated motor frequency (P107)
• pulse frequency (P761)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1Hz PcD Gr.: 1

11-28 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P455 Skip Frequency 0.0 to 300.0 2 2 / BR
Skip frequency for the frequency setpoint in front of the ramp generator. [Hz] i001=0.0 2 / BR
1C7Hex Steady state operation is not possible in the range of the positive and the i002=0.0
negative value of the skip frequency.
f out

P455 1 Hz
1 Hz

f in f out
0 f in

- P455

Note: Frequency skipping is OFF at parameter values between 0.0 and

1.0 Hz
SDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P457 Min Frequency 0.0 to 300.0 2 2 / BR
Minimum frequency fmin (amount) of the drive; same as frequency skipping [Hz] i001=0.0 2 / BR
1C9Hex around 0 Hz with a bandwidth of 2 * fmin, effective for the setpoint signal in i002=0.0
front of the ramp generator
Given setpoint fset: realized setpoint
• -fmin < fset (coming from lower values) < fmin - fmin
• -fmin < fset (coming from higher values) < fmin + fmin
• 0 <= fset (after turn ON) < fmin + fmin
• -fmin < fset (after turn ON) < 0 - fmin
• fset > fmin fset
• fset < -fmin fset
Note: The bits for forward / reverse operation (see P571, P572) are allowed
for.
SDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1Hz PcD Gr.: 1
r460 n/f(set,Ramp IN) - 3 / BR
Frequency setpoint signal at ramp generator input [Hz]
1CCHex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=P420
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
r461 Ramp Gen Status - 3 / BR
Status of the ramp generator
1CDHex Parameter values: 0: ramp generator blocked Locked
1: ramp generator released Released
2: ramp generator stopped STOP
4: ramp generator set Set
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=16384
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P462 Accel. Time 0.1 to 999.9 2 2 / ABR
Ramp generator acceleration time for acceleration from 0 to rated system [s] i001=10.0 2 / ABR
1CEHex frequency (P420). i002=10.0
SDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1s PcD Gr.: 0
P464 Decel. Time 0.1 to 999.9 2 2 / ABR
Ramp generator deceleration time for deceleration from rated system [s] i001=20.0 2 / ABR
1D0Hex frequency (P420) to standstill i002=20.0
SDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1s PcD Gr.: 0

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-29

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P466 Decel. Time OFF3 0.1 to 999.9 - 2 / BR
OFF3 deceleration time (quick stop) for deceleration from rated system [s] 2.0 2 / BR
1D2Hex frequency (P420) to standstill
Note: Rounding (P468) is not active during OFF3.
Description for setting: The parameter value must be high enough to prevent
an overvoltage fault.
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1s PcD Gr.: 0
P467 ProtRampGen Gain 1.0 to 100.0 2 3 / BR
Protective ramp generator: factor, which extends the acceleration time i001=1.0 3 / BR
1D3Hex (P462). The protective ramp generator is active up to 15 % of rated motor i002=1.0
frequency (P107); see section „Ramp-function generator RFG“ in the
Operating Instructions, Part 2
Description for setting: Parameter value 1,0 turns OFF the protective ramp
generator.
SDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1 PcD Gr.: 0
P468 Ramp Smoothing 0 to 50 2 2 / BR
Rounding of the ramp generator in % of the acceleration (P462) and [%] i001=20 2 / BR
1D4Hex deceleration times (P464). i002=20
At accelerating from 0 to rated system frequency (P420) the real acceleration
 P468 
time will increase to P462 ⋅ 1 +  .
 100 %

Description for Setting:

The parameter value is symmetrically shared to start and end roundings.
SDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0% PcD Gr.: -
P476 RampGen Act Hyst 0.0 to 20.0 - 3 / BR
Hysteresis for the message 'ramp generator active' [%] 1.0 3 / BR
1DCHex The message 'ramp generator active' is issued, if
|ramp generator input - ramp generator output| >= P476 * P420 .
Condition: analog frequency setpoint in front of the ramp generator (see
P428 and P443)
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1% PcD Gr.: -
r480 n/f(set,rampOUT) - 3 / BR
Frequency setpoint at the output of the ramp generator [Hz]
1E0Hex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=P420
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
r481 n/f(set,total2) - 3 / BR
Frequency setpoint at the addition point behind the ramp generator [Hz]
1E1Hex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=P420
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
r482 n/f(set) - 2 / BR
Frequency setpoint at the input of the V/Hz control circuit [Hz]
1E2Hex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=P420
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P512 Compare Freq 0.00 to 320.00 - 3 / BR
Compare frequency for the message 'Compare frequency reached' (status [Hz] 50.00 3 / BR
200Hex word 1, bit 10 (r552)); see also P513 (Hysteresis)
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P513 Comp Freq. Hyst 0.0 to 100.0 - 3 / BR
Hysteresis for the message 'Compare frequency reached' in % of the [%] 3.0 3 / BR
201Hex compare frequency (P512)
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1% PcD Gr.: 0

11-30 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P514 OFF Frequency 0.00 to 300.00 - 3 / BR
Pulse block frequency at turn OFF [Hz] 0.10 3 / BR
202Hex If after an OFF command (OFF1, OFF3) the actual value of the frequency
(r218) comes below this value, the pulses are blocked after the OFF wait time
(P516).
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P516 OFF Wait Time 0.0 to 60.0 2 3 / BR
Wait time between reaching of the pulse block frequency (P514) and pulse [s] i001=0.0 3 / BR
204Hex blocking; only for turn OFF via OFF1 or OFF3. i002=0.0
SDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1s PcD Gr.: 0
P517 Deviation Freq 0.00 to 300.00 - 3 / BR
Deviation frequency for the message 'Set/Actual deviation' (status word 1, bit [Hz] 3.00 3 / BR
205Hex 8 (r552)); the message is issued if the deviation is higher than the parameter
value; see also P518 (deviation time)
Depending items: P520 (pull out / blocking wait time)
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
P518 Deviation Time 0.0 to 10.0 - 3 / BR
Minimum time of the Set/Actual deviation; after this minimum time a [s] 3.0 3 / BR
206Hex Set/Actual deviation (P517) issues the message 'Set/Actual deviation' (status
word 1, bit 8 (r552))
Depending items: P520 (pull out / blocking wait time)
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1s PcD Gr.: -
P520 PullOut/BlckTime 0.00 to 100.00 2 3 / BR
Wait time between the message 'motor puled out/blocked' and issuing a fault [s] i001=50.00 3 / BR
208Hex message i002=50.00
Dependent parameters: P517 (speed of the set/actual deviation),
P518 (set/actual deviation time)
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01s PcD Gr.: 0
P525 Fix Setp ProcReg −200.00 to 200.00 2 3 / BR
Fixed setpoints for the technology controller [%] i001=0.00 3 / BR
20DHex B/R parameter i002=0.00
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01 % PcD: 4000HEX=100.00 %
P526 Src ProcReg Setp 0 to 4545 2 3 / BR
* Source for the technology controller setpoint. i001=0 3 / BR
20EHex Parameter values: i002=0
1001: Technology setpoint (P525)
1002: Not permissible
Additional value: According to PcD wiring of the setpoint channel
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P527 SetpGain ProcReg −300.00 to 300.00 2 3 / BR
Technology controller setpoint gain. [%] i001=100.00 3 / BR
20FHex Not effective for technology setpoint input via fixed setpoint (P526 = 1001). i002=100.00
B/R parameter
Type=O2; PKW:1HEX=0.01 % PcD Gr.: 0
P528 SmoothProcRegSet 0.00 to 600.00 - 3 / BR
* Technology controller setpoint smoothing time constant. [s] 0.00 3 / BR
210Hex The smoothing first becomes active when the technology controller is
activated (control word 2 bit 24 = 1 and RUN status).
Type=O2; PKW:1HEX=0.01 s PcD Gr.: 0

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-31

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
r529 Setpoint ProcReg − 3 / BR
Actual technological setpoint [%]
211Hex Analog output: 100 % for PWE=100.00 %
Type=I4; PKW: 1HEX=0.01 % PcD: 4000HEX=100.00 %
P530 ActVal’s ProcReg 0 to 999 2 3 / BR
* Actual values for the technology controller actual value input. i001=0.0 3 / BR
212Hex Defines which parameter are used as actual values for the technology i002=0.0
controller.
Indices: i001 = W01: Value1 for technology controller
i002 = W02: Value2 for technology controller
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P531 SRC ProcReg ActV 0 to 4545 2 3 / BR
* Source of the technology controller actual value. i001=0 3 / BR
213Hex Parameter values: i002=0
1001: Illegal
1002: Illegal
1020: Illegal
1100: Internal technology controller actual value 1
(= contents of P530 index i001)
1200: Internal technology controller actual value 2
(= contents of P530 index i002)
Additional values: According to the PcD wiring of the setpoint channel
B/R parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P532 Gain ProcRegActV −300.00 to 300.00 2 3 / BR
* Technology controller actual value gain. [%] i001=100.00 3 / BR
214Hex B/R parameter i002=100.00
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01 % PcD Gr.: 0
r534 ActValueProcReg − 3 / BR
Technological actual value [%]
216Hex Analog output: 100 % at PWE=100.00 %
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01 % PcD: 4000HEX=100.000 %
P535 R,g. T:Hyst. 0.0 to 100.0 − 3 / BR
* Hysteresis for the signal - technological setpoint reached. [%] 3.0 3 / BR
217Hex This signal is output, if the technological actual value (r534) is greater than
the technological setpoint (r529). The hysteresis is only effective when this
signal is withdrawn
Type=O2; PKW:1HEX=0.1 % PcD: 4000HEX=100.0 %
r536 DeviationProcReg − 3 / BR
Control deviation at the input of the technology controller. [%]
218Hex Analog output: 100 % at PWE=100.00 %
Type=I4; PKW: 1HEX=0.01 % PcD: 4000HEX=100.00 %
P537 Gain ProcReg 0.00 to 250.00 − 3 / BR
Technology controller gain. 1.00 3 / BR
219Hex Type=O2; PKW:1HEX=0.01 PcD: 4000HEX=64.00
P538 IntTConstProcReg 0.00 to 600.00 − 3 / BR
Technology controller integral action time (I component). [s] 0.00 3 / BR
21AHex Setting information: The technology controller I component is disabled with
the value 0.00.
Type=O2; PKW:1HEX=0.01 s PcD Gr.: 0
r540 ProcReg Output − 3 / BR
Technology controller output before the limit value stage (P541, P542). [%]
21CHex Analog output: 100 % at PWE=100.00 %
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01 % PcD: 4000HEX=100.00 %

11-32 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P541 ProcReg Up1Limit −200.00 to 200.00 − 3 / BR
Upper limit of the technology controller output. [%] 200.00 3 / BR
21DHex Type=I2; PKW:1HEX=0.01 % PcD: 4000HEX=100.00 %
P542 ProcReg Up2Limit −200.00 to 200.00 − 3 / BR
Lower limit of the technology controller output. [%] 200.00 3 / BR
21EHex Type=I2; PKW:1HEX=0.01 % PcD: 4000HEX=100.00 %
r545 ProcReg Out(Lim) − 3 / BR
Limited technology controller output (after the limit value stage). [%]
221Hex Analog output: 100 % at PWE=100.00 %
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01 % PcD: 4000HEX=100.00 %

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-33

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

11.9 Control and Status Word

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_
[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
r550 Control Word 1 - 2 / BR
Display of the control word 1 (bits 0 to 15); see section „Control word“ in the
226Hex Operating Instructions, Part 2
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0

Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0

r551 Control Word 2 - 2 / BR
Display of the control word 2 (bits 16 to 31); see section „Control word“ in the
227Hex Operating Instructions, Part 2.
31 29 27 25
30 28 26 24
23 21 19 17
22 20 18 16
Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r552 Status Word 1 - 2 / BR
Display of the status word 1 (bits 0 to 15); see section „Control word“ in the
228Hex Operating Instructions, Part 2.
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0

Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0

r553 Status Word 2 - 2 / BR
Display of the status word 2 (bits 16 to 31); see section „Control word“ in the
229Hex Operating Instructions, Part 2.
31 29 27 25
30 28 26 24
23 21 19 17
22 20 18 16
Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P554 Src ON/OFF1 0 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source of the 'ON/OFF1' command (Control word 1, bit 0) P077=0 2 / BR
22AHex Details see section „Control word“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2 i001=1010
Parameter values: 0: OFF1 i002=1001
1: not allowed
1001 CU binary input 1 P077=1,2
1003: CU binary input 3 i001=2001
1010: PMU ON/OFF keys i002=1001
2001: SST1, Word 1,Bit 0
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in P077=3
the Operating Instructions, Part 2 i001=1003
(PcD connection of the control word)
i002=1001
Note: When using the inputs of the serial IO system, values 4101 or
4201 are recommended.
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P555 Src1 OFF2(coast) 1 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source 1 of the 'OFF2' command (Coasting; control word 1, bit 1) i001=1 2 / BR
22BHex Details see section „Control word“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2 i002=1002
Parameter values: 0: not allowed
1: condition for operation
1002: CU binary input 2
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in
the Operating Instructions, Part 2
(PcD connection of the control word)
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0

11-34 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P556 Src2 OFF2(coast) 1 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source 2 of the 'OFF2' command (Coasting; control word 1, bit 1) i001=1 2 / BR
22CHex Description see P555 i002=1
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P557 Src3 OFF2(coast) 1 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source 3 of the 'OFF2' command (Coasting; control word 1, bit 1) i001=1 2 / BR
22DHex Description see P555 i002=1
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P558 Src1 OFF3(QStop) 1 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source 1 of the 'OFF3' command (quick stop; control word 1, bit 2) i001=1 2 / BR
22EHex Details see section „Control word“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2 i002=1
Parameter values: 0: not allowed
1: condition for operation
1002 binary input 2 of CU board
1010: PMU OFF key
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in
the Operating Instructions, Part 2
(PcD connection of the control word)
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P559 Src2 OFF3(QStop) 1 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source 2 of the 'OFF3' command (quick stop; control word 1, bit 2) i001=1 2 / BR
22FHex Description see P558 i002=1
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P560 Src3 OFF3(QStop) 1 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source 3 of the 'OFF3' command (quick stop; control word 1, bit 2) i001=1 2 / BR
230Hex Description see P558 i002=1
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P561 Src InvRelease 0 to 5001 2 3 / BR
* Source of the 'inverter release' command (control word 1, bit 3) i001=1 3 / BR
231Hex Details see section „Control word“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2 i002=1
Parameter values: 0: Inverter blocked
1: automatic release after wait times
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in
the Operating Instructions, Part 2
(PcD connection of the control word)
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P562 Src RampGen Rel 0 to 5001 2 3 / BR
* Source of the 'ramp generator release' command (control word 1, bit 4) i001=1 3 / BR
232Hex Details see section„Control word“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2 i002=1
Parameter values: 0: Ramp generator blocked
1: automatic release after wait times
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in
the Operating Instructions, Part 2
(PcD connection of the control word)
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-35

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P563 Src RampGen Stop 0 to 5001 2 3 / BR
* Source of the 'ramp generator stop' command (control word 1, bit 5) i001=1 3 / BR
233Hex Details see section „Control word“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2 i002=1
Parameter values: 0: ramp generator stopped
1: ramp generator released
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in
the Operating Instructions, Part 2
(PcD connection of the control word)
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P564 Src Setp Release 0 to 5001 2 3 / BR
* Source of the 'setpoint release' command (control word 1, bit 6) i001=1 3 / BR
234Hex Details see section „Control word“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2 i002=1
Parameter values: 0: Ramp generator input is set to '0'
1: Setpoint at ramp generator input
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in
the Operating Instructions, Part 2
(PcD connection of the control word)
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P565 Src1 Fault Reset 0 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source 1 of the 'reset' command (control word 1, bit 7) P077=0,1,2 2 / BR
235Hex Details see section „Control word“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2 i001=0
Parameter values: 0: no source selected for reset i002=1003
1: not allowed
1003 Binary input 3 of the CU board P077=3
1004: Binary input 4 of the CU board i001=1004
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in i002=1003
the Operating Instructions, Part 2
(PcD connection of the control word)
Note: The control command ‘acknowledge’ is edge triggered.
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P566 Src2 Fault Reset 0 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source 2 of the 'reset' command (control word 1, bit 7) i001=0 2 / BR
236Hex Description see P565 i002=0
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P567 Src3 Fault Reset 0 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source 3 of the 'reset' command (control word 1, bit 7) i001=2001 2 / BR
237Hex Description see P565 i002=2001
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P568 Src Jog1 ON 0 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source of the 'Jog 1' command (control word 1, bit 8) P077=0,3 2 / BR
238Hex Details see section „Control word“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2 i001=0
Parameter values: 0: no Jog operation i002=0
1: not allowed
2001: SST1, Word 1, Bit 8 P077=1,2
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in i001=2001
the Operating Instructions, Part 2 i002=0
(PcD connection of the control word)
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0

11-36 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P571 Src FWD speed 0 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source of the 'forward speed' command (control word 1, bit 11) P077=0,3 2 / BR
23BHex Parameter values: 0: forward speed blocked i001=1
1: forward speed released i002=1
1010: PMU forward/reverse key
2001: SST1, Word 1, Bit 11 P077=1,2
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in i001=2001
the Operating Instructions, Part 2 i002=1
(PcD connection of the control word)
Note: Both parameters P571 and P572 or the sources defined by them
define which of the directions are really released:
P571: Src FWD speed
P572: Src REV speed
0 00
Setpoint FWD 0 1 r451
-1 REV 1 0
11

B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P572 Src REV speed 0 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source of the 'reverse speed' command (control word 1, bit 12) P077=0,3 2 / BR
23CHex Parameter values: 0: reverse speed blocked i001=1
1: reverse speed released i002=1
1010: PMU forward/reverse key
2001: SST1, Word 1, Bit 12 P077=1,2
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in i001=2001
the Operating Instructions, Part 2 i002=1
(PcD connection of the control word)
Note: The two parameters P571 and P572 or the values which are supplied
from the sources defined for these parameters, defines which
direction of rotation is actually enabled; refer to P571.
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P573 Src MOP UP 0 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source of the command 'motor operated potentiometer (MOP) UP' (control P077=0,3 2 / BR
23DHex word 1, bit 13) i001=1010
Parameter values: 0: not active i002=0
1: not allowed
1010: PMU UP key P077=1,2
2001: SST1, Word 1, Bit 13 i001=2001
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in i002=0
the Operating Instructions, Part 2
(PcD connection of the control word)
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P574 Src MOP DOWN 0 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source of the command 'motor operated potentiometer (MOP) DOWN' P077=0,3 2 / BR
23EHex (control word 1, bit 14) i001=1010
Parameter values: 0: not active i002=0
1: not allowed
1010: PMU DOWN key P077=1,2
2001: SST1, Word 1, Bit 14 i001=2001
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in i002=0
the Operating Instructions, Part 2
(PcD connection of the control word)
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-37

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P575 Src No ExtFault1 1 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source of the message 'external fault 1' (control word 2, bit 27); L-level P077=0,1 2 / BR
23FHex causes fault trip of the drive i001=1
Parameter values: 0: not allowed i002=1
1: no external fault 1
1001: Binary input 1 of CU board P077=2,3
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in i001=1001
the Operating Instructions, Part 2 i002=1
(PcD connection of the control word)
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P576 Src SetpDSetBit0 0 to 5001 2 3 / BR
* Source of bit 0 for the selection of the setpoint channel data set (SDS; control i001=0 3 / BR
240Hex word 2, bit 16) i002=0
Parameter values: 0: SDS bit 0 has value of 0
1: SDS bit 0 has value of 1
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in
the Operating Instructions, Part 2
(PcD connection of the control word)
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P578 Src MotDSet Bit0 0 to 5001 2 3 / BR
* Source of bit 0 for the selection of motor data set (MDS; control word 2, bit i001=0 3 / BR
242Hex 18) i002=0
Parameter values: 0: MDS bit 0 has value of 0
1: MDS bit 0 has value of 1
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in
the Operating Instructions, Part 2
(PcD connection of the control word)
Note: The motor data set can not be changed during operation; a change of
this bit will only become effective in the ready state.
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P580 Src FixSetp Bit0 0 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source of bit 0 to select a fixed setpoint FS (control word 2, bit 20) i001=0 2 / BR
244Hex Parameter values: 0: FS bit 0 has value of 0 i002=1004
1: FS bit 0 has value of 1
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in
the Operating Instructions, Part 2
(PcD connection of the control word)
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P581 Src FixSetp Bit1 0 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source of bit 1 to select a fixed setpoint FS (control word 2, bit 21) i001=0 2 / BR
245Hex Parameter values: 0: FS bit 1 has value of 0 i002=0
1: FS bit 1 has value of 1
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in
the Operating Instructions, Part 2
(PcD connection of the control word)
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0

11-38 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P583 Src Fly Release 0 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source of the command 'release of flying restart' (control word 2, bit 23) i001=0 2 / BR
247Hex Parameter values: 0: Flying restart not released i002=0
1: Flying restart released with every ON command
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in
the Operating Instructions, Part 2
(PcD connection of the control word)
Dependent parameter:
Special behavior in combination with the auto restart function see P366
(auto restart).
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P584 Src.TReg.Enable 0 to 5001 2 3 / BR
* Source for the control command, technolgoy controller enable i001=0 3 / BR
248Hex (control word2, bit24) i002=0
Parameter values: 0: Technology controller not enabled
1: Technology controller enabled
other values refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in
the Operating Instructions, Part 2
(PcD connection of the control word)
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P586 Src No ExtFault2 1 to 5001 2 2 / BR
* Source of the message 'external fault 2' (control word 2, bit 26) i001=1 2 / BR
24AHex L signal fault trips the unit if i002=1
• precharging has been completed (drive converter status > 10)
• and the 200 ms delay time after precharging has expired
Parameter values: 0: not allowed
1: no external fault 2
1004: CU binary input 4
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in
the Operating Instructions, Part 2
(PcD connection of the control word)
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P588 Src No Ext Warn1 1 to 5001 2 3 / BR
* Source of the message 'external warning 1' (control word 2, bit 28) P077=0,1 3 / BR
24CHex Parameter values: 0: not allowed i001=1
1: no external warning 1 i002=1
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in
the Operating Instructions, Part 2 P077=2,3
(PcD connection of the control word) i001=1002
B/R Parameter i002=1
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P589 Src No Ext Warn2 1 to 5001 2 3 / BR
* Source of the message 'external warning 2' (control word 2, bit 29) i001=1 3 / BR
24DHex Parameter values: 0: not allowed i002=1
1: no external warning 1
1002: CU binary input 2
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in
the Operating Instructions, Part 2
(PcD connection of the control word)
B/R Parameter
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-39

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P590 Src Base/Reserve 0 to 5001 - 3 / BR
* Source of the switching command 'base / reserve settings' (control word 2, bit 1005 3 / BR
24EHex 30)
Parameter values: 0: base setting
1: reserve setting
1005: Binary input 5 of the CU board
other values: refer to permissible settings in Section „Control word“ in
the Operating Instructions, Part 2
(PcD connection of the control word)
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P591 Src ContactorMsg 1 to 5001 - 3 / BR
* Source of the message 'main contactor energized' (control word 2, bit 31) 1 3 / BR
24FHex Parameter values: 0: not allowed
1: no message; main contactor must be
energized within 120 msec after the
related command
1001 to 1005: CU terminals
4101 to 4116: SCB-SCI1 terminals (serial I/O)
4201 to 4216: SCB-SCI2 terminals (serial I/O)
5001: TSY terminal 1
Notes: If the function is active, pulses are released as soon as the message
is available.
No base / reserve settings possible
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P600 Dst Ready for ON 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'ready for turn ON' (status word 1, bit 0) i001=0 3 / BR
258Hex Power is ON, the drive may be turned on. i002=0
Parameter values: i003=0
Depending on the selected index all settings according to section „Status
word“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2 (PcD connection of the status
word) may be selected.
Indices: i001: BD: selection of a base drive terminal
i002: SCI : selection of a SCI1/2 terminal
i003: TSY : selection of a TSY terminal
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P601 Dst Rdy for Oper 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'ready for operation' (status word 1, bit 1) i001=0 3 / BR
259Hex The DC bus is charged, pulses may be released. i002=0
Parameter values, indices: as P600. i003=0
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P602 Dst Operation 0 to 5002 3 2 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'operation' (status word 1, bit 2) i001=1003 2 / BR
25AHex The drive is in operation. i002=0
Parameter values, Indices: as P600 i003=0

Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0

P603 Dst Fault 0 to 5002 3 2 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'fault' (status word 1, Bit 3) i001=1002 2 / BR
25BHex Note: for issuing the fault message via a terminal the active status (bit has i002=0
H-level) is inverted (broken wire proof). i003=0
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P604 Dst NO OFF2 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'no OFF2 command' (status word 1, bit 4) i001=0 3 / BR
25CHex Parameter values, Indices: as P600 i002=0
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0 i003=0

11-40 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P605 Dst NO OFF3 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'no OFF3 command' (status word 1, bit 5) i001=0 3 / BR
25DHex Parameter values, Indices: as P600 i002=0
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0 i003=0
P606 Dst ON blocked 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'turn-ON locked' (status word 1, bit 6) i001=0 3 / BR
25EHex Note: for issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H- i002=0
level) is inverted (broken wire proof). i003=0
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P607 Dst Warning 0 to 5002 3 2 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'warning' (status word 1, bit 7) i001=0 2 / BR
25FHex Note: for issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H- i002=0
level) is inverted (broken wire proof). i003=0
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P608 Dst Deviation 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'set frequency = act. frequency' (status word 1, bit i001=0 3 / BR
260Hex 8) - see P517; for details see section „Status word“ in Operating Instructions, i002=0
Part 2 i003=0
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P610 Dst CompareFreq 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'compare frequency reached' (status word 1, bit i001=0 3 / BR
262Hex 10) - see P512; for details see section „Status word“ in Operating Instructions, i002=0
Part 2 i003=0
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P611 Dst Low Voltage 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'undervoltage' (status word 1, bit 11) i001=0 3 / BR
263Hex Note: for issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H- i002=0
level) is inverted (broken wire proof). i003=0
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P612 Dst Contactor 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the bit 'energize main contactor' (status word 1, bit 12) i001=1001 3 / BR
264Hex H-level: energize contactor! i002=0
Note: If the message 'main contactor energized' is not selected (P591 = 1), i003=0
the main contactor must be energized within 120 ms after the bit
'energize main contactor' is set.
ATTENTION: For switching voltages between 50 and 230 V AC only the
following relays may be used:
- relay on the PEU or the PSU board (driven via binary output
1) or
- the relays of the optional SCI boards, which are specified for
230 V AC (see section „Bypass- and output contactor“ in the
Operating Instructions, Part 1)
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P613 Dst RampGen act 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'ramp generator active' (status word 1, bit 13) i001=0 3 / BR
265Hex Parameter values, Indices: as P600 i002=0
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0 i003=0

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-41

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P614 Dst FWD speed 0 to 5002 3 2 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'speed direction' (status word 1, bit 14) i001=0 2 / BR
266Hex Meanings: H-level: forward i002=0
L-level: reverse i003=0
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P615 PRT active 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'power ride thru (PRT) active' (status word 1, bit i001=0 3 / BR
267Hex 15) i002=0
Parameter values, Indices: as P600 i003=0
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P616 Dst Fly Restart 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'flying restart active' and ‘energization time i001=0 3 / BR
268Hex running’ (status word 2, bit 16) (refer to P189) i002=0
Parameter values, Indices: as P600 i003=0
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P618 Dst No Overspeed 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'no overspeed' (status word 2, bit 18) i001=0 3 / BR
26AHex Parameter values, Indices: as P600 i002=0
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0 i003=0
P619 Dst Ext Fault 1 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'external fault 1' (status word 2, bit 19) i001=0 3 / BR
26BHex Note: for issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H- i002=0
level) is inverted (broken wire proof). i003=0
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P620 Dst Ext Fault 2 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'external fault 2' (status word 2, bit 20) i001=0 3 / BR
26CHex Note: • for issuing the message via a terminal the active status i002=0
(bit has H-level) is inverted (broken wire proof). i003=0
• If an ON command is active, L-level causes fault trip after
200 msec.
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P621 Dst Ext Warning 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'external warning' (status word 2, bit 21) i001=0 3 / BR
26DHex Note: for issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H- i002=0
level) is inverted (broken wire proof). i003=0
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P622 Dst i2t Drive 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'warning drive overload' (status word 2, bit 22); i001=0 3 / BR
26EHex see r010 (drive utilization) i002=0
Note: for issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H- i003=0
level) is inverted (broken wire proof).
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P623 Dst TmpFlt Drive 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'fault drive overtemperature' (status word 2, bit i001=0 3 / BR
26FHex 23) i002=0
Note: for issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H- i003=0
level) is inverted (broken wire proof).
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0

11-42 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P624 Dst TmpWarnDrive 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'warning drive overtemperature' (status word 2, bit i001=0 3 / BR
270Hex 24) i002=0
Note: for issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H- i003=0
level) is inverted (broken wire proof).
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P625 Dst TmpWarnMotor 0 to 5002 3 2 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'warning motor overtemperature' (status word 2, i001=0 2 / BR
271Hex bit 25) i002=0
Reason: The condition for the warning is met via the motor utilization i003=0
calculation (see r008 (motor utilization), P362 (motor cooling),
P363 (thermal time constant of the motor), P364 (duty cycle
monitoring)).
Note: for issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H-
level) is inverted (broken wire proof).
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P626 Dst TmpFlt Motor 0 to 5002 3 2 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'fault motor overtemperature' (status word 2, bit i001=0 2 / BR
272Hex 26) i002=0
Reason: The condition for the fault is met via the motor utilization i003=0
calculation (see r008 (motor utilization), P362 (motor cooling),
P363 (thermal time constant of the motor), P364 (duty cycle
monitoring)).
Note: for issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H-
level) is inverted (broken wire proof).
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P627 Dst ProcReg A=S 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination connection of the status bit „technological setpoint reached“ i001=0 3 / BR
273Hex (status word 2, bit27) i002=0
Parameter values, indices: As for P600 i003=0
Type=L2; PKW: PKW format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P628 Dst PullOut/Blck 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'fault motor pulled out / blocked' (status word 2, bit i001=0 3 / BR
274Hex 28) i002=0
Note: for issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H- i003=0
level) is inverted (broken wire proof).
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P629 Dst ChrgRelay ON 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'charging relay energized' (status word 2, bit 29) i001=0 3 / BR
275Hex Note: for issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H- i002=0
level) is inverted (broken wire proof). i003=0
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
P631 Dst Pre-Charging 0 to 5002 3 3 / BR
* Destination of the status bit 'charging active' (status word 2, bit 31) i001=0 3 / BR
277Hex Parameter values, Indices: as P600 i002=0
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0 i003=0

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-43

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

11.10 Analog Input/Output

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_
[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P650 CU AnalogInConf 0 to 2 2 2 / BR
* Configuration of the CU analog inputs; defines the kind of the analog input i001=0 2 / BR
28AHex signals i002=0
Parameter values Terminals Terminals
27 and 30 29 and 32
0: -10 V ... + 10 V - 20 mA ... + 20 mA -10V...+10V
1: 0 V ... + 10 V 0 mA ... + 20 mA 0V...+10V
2: + 4 mA ... + 20 mA 4mA...20mA
Notes:
• Only one signal can be wired per input; alternatively voltage or current
signals can be evaluated.
• Voltage and current signals must be connected to different terminals.
• Settings 1 and 2 only allow unipolar signals, i. e. the internal process data
are also unipolar.
• At setting 2 an input current < 2 mA causes a fault trip (broken wire proof)
• The offset scaling of the analog inputs is done via P652.
Indices: i001: CU-1: configuration of analog terminal 1
i002: CU-2: configuration of analog terminal 2
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P652 CU AnalogIn Offs -20.000 to 20.000 2 2 / BR
Offset scaling of the CU analog inputs [V] i001=0.000 2 / BR
28CHex Description for setting see section „Analog inputs“ in the Operating i002=0.000
Instructions, Part 2
Indices: i001: CU-1: offset of analog input 1
i002: CU-2 offset of analog input 2
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.001V PcD Gr.: 0
P655 CU AnaOut ActVal 0 to 999 - 2 / BR
* Actual value output via the CU analog output 218 2 / BR
28FHex Description for setting: enter the parameter number of the quantity, which is
to be issued.
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P656 CU AnalogOutGain -320.00 to 320.00 - 2 / BR
Proportional gain of the CU analog output, see section „Analog inputs“ in the [V] 10.00 2 / BR
290Hex Operating Instructions, Part 2
Parameter values:
P656= calculated output voltage at when the displayed parameter has a
value of 100%
The output voltage V(out) is calculated according to:
value of displayed parameter
V(out) = * P656 + P657
100 %
Note: Maximum value of the output voltage: +/- 10 V
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01V PcD Gr.: 0
P657 CU AnalogOutOffs -100.00 to 100.00 - 2 / BR
Offset of the CU analog output; see P656 [V] 0.00 2 / BR
291Hex Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01V PcD Gr.: 0

11-44 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P660 SCI AnalogInConf 0 to 2 6 3 / BR
Configuration of the SCI analog inputs; defines the kind of the input signals i001=0 3 / BR
294Hex Parameter values Terminals Terminals i002=0
X428 / 3, 6, 9 X428 / 5, 8, 11 i003=0
0: -10 V ... + 10 V - 20 mA ... + 20 mA -10V...+10V i004=0
1: 0 V ... + 10 V 0 mA ... + 20 mA 0V...+10V
i005=0
2: 4 mA ... + 20 mA 4mA...20mA
i006=0
Notes:
• Only one signal can be wired per input; alternatively voltage or current
signals can be evaluated.
• Voltage and current signals must be connected to different terminals.
• Settings 1 and 2 only allow unipolar signals, i. e. the internal process data
are also unipolar.
• At setting 2 an input current < 2 mA causes a fault trip (broken wire proof)
• The offset scaling of the analog inputs is done via P662.
Indices: i001: Sl11 Slave 1, analog input 1
i002: Sl12 Slave 1, analog input 2
i003: Sl13 Slave 1, analog input 3
i004: Sl21 Slave 2, analog input 1
i005: Sl22 Slave 2, analog input 2
i006: Sl23 Slave 2, analog input 3
Condition: the related SCB board must be reported via P090 and P091,
respectively
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P661 SCI AnaInSmooth 0 to 15 6 3 / BR
Filter time constant of the SCI analog inputs; i001=2 3 / BR
295Hex Formula: T = 2 ms * 2P661 i002=2
Indices: see P660 i003=2
i004=2
i005=2
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: - i006=2
P662 SCI AnalogInOffs -20.00 to 20.00 6 3 / BR
Offset scaling of the SCI analog inputs [V] i001=0.00 3 / BR
296Hex Description for setting see SCI manual i002=0.00
Indices: see P660 i003=0.00
i004=0.00
i005=0.00
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01V PcD: 4000HEX=160V i006=0.00
P664 SCI AnaOutActVal 0 to 1999 6 3 / BR
* Actual value output via SCI analog outputs i001=0 3 / BR
298Hex Description for setting: i002=0
Enter the parameter number of the quantities, which are to be issued; for i003=0
details see SCI manual. i004=0
Indices: i001: Sl11 Slave 1, analog output 1 i005=0
i002: Sl12 Slave 1, analog output 2 i006=0
i003: Sl13 Slave 1, analog output 3
i004: Sl21 Slave 2, analog output 1
i005: Sl22 Slave 2, analog output 2
i006: Sl23 Slave 2, analog output 3
Condition: the related SCB board must be reported via P090 and P091,
respectively
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P665 SCI AnaOut Gain -320.00 to 320.00 6 3 / BR
Proportional gain of the SCI analog outputs i001=10.00 3 / BR
299Hex Description for setting: see SCI manual i002=10.00
Indices: see P664 i003=10.00
i004=10.00
i005=10.00
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01 PcD: 4000HEX=160V i006=10.00

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-45

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P666 SCI AnaOut Offs -100.00 to 100.00 6 3 / BR
Offset of the SCI analog outputs [V] i001=0.00 3 / BR
29AHex Indices: see P664 i002=0.00
i003=0.00
i004=0.00
i005=0.00
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01V PcD: 4000HEX=160V i006=0.00

11-46 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

11.11 Communications
PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_
[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P680 SCom1 Act Value 0 to 999 16 3 / BR
* Actual value output via serial communication SST1 i001=968 3 / BR
2A8Hex Defines, which parameter is to be transferred at which telegram address. i002=0
Notes: • Word 1 should be set for status word 1 (r968) i003=0
• The length (number of words) of the process data part of the i004=0
telegram is set by P685, i001 i005=0
i006=0
Indices: i001 = W01: Word 01 of the (process data part of the) telegram
i007=0
i002 = W02: Word 02 of the (process data part of the) telegram
i008=0
...
i009=0
i016 = W16: Word 16 of the (process data part of the) telegram
i010=0
i011=0
i012=0
i013=0
i014=0
i015=0
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0 i016=0
P682 SCB Protocol 0 to 5 - 3 / H BR
SCB can be operated as • master for the SCI boards or as 0 3/H
2AAHex • serial communications board
(see SCB manual).
Parameter values: 0 = Master for SCI boards SCI Module
1 = 4 wire USS 4 wire USS
2 = 2 wire USS 2 wire USS
3 = Peer to Peer Peer 2 Peer
4 = not used Option 1
5 = not used Option 2
Condition: SCB board must be reported via P090 and 0P91, respectively
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P683 SCom/SCB BusAddr 0 to 31 2 3 / BR
* Bus address of the serial communication interfaces (see section „Serial i001=0 3 / BR
2ABHex interfaces“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2) i002=0
Indices: i001 = SCo1: bus address of serial comm. interface 1 (CU)
i002 = SCB: SCB bus address, if P682 = 1, 2
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P684 SCom/SCB Baud 1 to 13 2 3 / BR
* Serial interfaces baud rate i001=6 3 / BR
2ACHex Parameter values: 1: 300 Baud 8: 38400 Baud i002=6
2: 600 Baud 9: 57600 Baud
3: 1200 Baud 10: 76800 Baud
4: 2400 Baud 11: 93750 Baud
5: 4800 Baud 12: 115200 Baud
6: 9600 Baud 13: 187500 Baud
7: 19200 Baud
Note: Maximum baud rate
for SST1 (i001): 38400
for SCB: dependent on the version and selected
protocol, refer to the SCB operating
instructions)
Indices: i001 = SCo1: baud rate of serial comm. interface 1 (CU)
i002 = SCB: SCB baud rate, if P682 = 1, 2, 3
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-47

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P685 SCom/SCB PCV 0 to 127 2 3 / BR
* Number of words (16 bit) of the parameter data part in the net data block of i001=127 3 / BR
2ADHex the telegram. i002=3
(see section „Serial interfaces“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2)
Parameter values: 0: no parameter data part in the telegram
3, 4 parameter data part is 3 (parameter identifier, Ind,
parameter value), 4 words long
127 variable parameter data length for the transfer of
parameter description and texts.
Indices: i001 = SCo1: serial comm. interface 1 (CU)
i002 = SCB: SCB, if P682 = 1, 2, 3
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P686 SCom/SCB # PrDat 0 to 16 2 3 / BR
* Number of words (16 bit) of the process data part in the net data block of the i001=2 3 / BR
2AEHex telegram. i002=2
(see section „Serial interfaces“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2)
Indices: i001 = SCo1: serial comm. interface 1 (CU)
i002 = SCB: SCB, if P682 = 1, 2, 3
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P687 SCom/SCB TlgOFF 0 to 6500 2 3 / BR
* Telegram OFF time of CU and SCB [ms] i001=0 3 / BR
2AFHex If no correct telegram is received within the parameterized time a fault trip is i002=0
set.
Description for setting:
• Value 0: no monitoring, no fault trip; must be parameterized for sporadic
(a-cyclic) telegrams, e. g. operator panel OP at serial comm. interface 1.
• If a TB is inserted in slot 2, and an SCB in slot 3, then the value in i002 is
ineffective
Indices: i001 = SCo1: serial comm. interface 1 (CU)
i002 = SCB: SCB, if P682 = 1, 2, 3
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0ms PcD: 4000HEX=1638.4ms
P689 SCB Peer2PeerExt 0 to 1 5 3 / BR
Immediate transfer on of data received via the peer to peer protocol of SCB. i001=0 3 / BR
2B1Hex Mark of these words of the received peer to peer telegram which are to be i002=0
transferred on immediately. i003=0
Parameter values: 0: no immediate transfer (only to CU) CU only i004=0
1: immediate transfer (and passing to CU) Transfer i005=0
Indices: i001 = W01: Word 01 of the (process data part of the) telegram
i002 = W02: Word 02 of the (process data part of the) telegram
...
i016 = W16: Word 16 of the (process data part of the) telegram
Condition: P688 = 3 (peer to peer protocol)
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -

11-48 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P690 SCB Act Values 0 to 999 16 3 / BR
* Actual value output via the serial communications interface of the SCB board; i001=0 3 / BR
2B2Hex defines, which parameter is to be transferred at which telegram address. i002=0
Notes: • Word 1 should be set for status word 1 (r968) i003=0
• The length (number of words) of the process data part of the i004=0
telegram is set by P685, index i002 i005=0
i006=0
Indices: i001 = W01: Word 01 of the (process data part of the) telegram
i007=0
i002 = W02: Word 02 of the (process data part of the) telegram
i008=0
...
i009=0
i016 = W16: Word 16 of the (process data part of the) telegram
i010=0
ATTENTION: if P682 = 3 (peer to peer protocol) a maximum of 5 words (i001 i011=0
to i005) can be transferred i012=0
i013=0
i014=0
i015=0
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0 i016=0
P692 ResPonseTLGfail 0 to 1 - 3 / BR
* Defines how the unit responds when a telegram fails. - 3 / BR
2B4Hex Parameter values: 0: Immediate fault trip Fault
1: OFF3 (fast stop) and subsequent fault trip OFF3(fast stop)
Note: This parameter is valid for all interfaces, where a telegram monitoring
time is defined (SST1, CB/TB, SCB, SST2)
Condition: The particular program monitoring time must be active. (P687
or P695 > 0)
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P694 CB/TB Act Values 0 to 999 16 3 / BR
* Output of analog values via CB or TB i001=968 3 / BR
2B6Hex defines, which parameter is to be transferred at which telegram address. i002=0
Notes: • Word 1 should be set for status word 1 (r968) i003=0
i004=0
Indices: i001 = W01: Word 01 of the (process data part of the) telegram
i005=0
i002 = W02: Word 02 of the (process data part of the) telegram
i006=0
...
i007=0
i016 = W16: Word 16 of the (process data part of the) telegram
i008=0
i009=0
i010=0
i011=0
i012=0
i013=0
i014=0
i015=0
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0 i016=0
P695 CB/TB TlgOFFTime 0 to 6500 - 3 / BR
* Telegram lag time of CB and TB [ms] 10 3 / BR
2B7Hex If no correct telegram is received within the parameterized time a fault trip is
set.
Description for setting:
Value 0: no monitoring, no fault trip; must be parameterized for sporadic
(non-cyclic) telegrams, e. g. operator panel OP at serial comm.
interface 1.
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0ms PcD: 4000HEX=1638.4ms

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-49

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P696 CB Parameter 1 0 to 65535 - 3 / H BR
Communication Board parameter 1; see manual of the used communication 0 3/H
2B8Hex board
Description for setting:
• Parameter is only needed if a communication board is reported (P090 or
P091 = 1)
• The communication board checks, if the set value is valid.
• If the value is not accepted, the fault message 80 is issued with fault
value 5
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P697 CB Parameter 2 0 to 65535 - 3 / H BR
Communication Board parameter 2; refer to P696 0 3/H
2B9Hex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P698 CB Parameter 3 0 to 65535 - 3 / H BR
Communication Board parameter 3; refer to P696 0 3/H
2BAHex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P699 CB Parameter 4 0 to 65535 - 3 / H BR
Communication Board parameter 4; refer to P696 0 3/H
2BBHex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P700 CB Parameter 5 0 to 65535 - 3 / H BR
Communication Board parameter 5; refer to P696 0 3/H
2BCHex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P701 CB Parameter 6 0 to 65535 - 3 / H BR
Communication Board parameter 6; refer to P696 0 3/H
2BDHex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P702 CB Parameter 7 0 to 65535 - 3 / H BR
Communication Board parameter 7; refer to P696 0 3/H
2BEHex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P703 CB Parameter 8 0 to 65535 - 3 / H BR
Communication Board parameter 8; refer to P696 0 3/H
2BFHex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P704 CB Parameter 9 0 to 65535 - 3 / H BR
Communication Board parameter 9; refer to P696 0 3/H
2C0Hex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P705 CB Parameter 10 0 to 65535 - 3 / H BR
Communication Board parameter 10; refer to P696 0 3/H
2C1Hex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P706 CB Parameter 11 0 to 65535 5 3 / H BR
Communication Board parameter 11 i001=0 3/H
2C3Hex Indices: i001 - i005 i002=0
Refer to P696 i003=0
i004=0
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
i005=0

11-50 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

11.12 Diagnosis
PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_
[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
r720 SW Version 4 3 /U BR
Software version of the PCBs in positions 1 to 3 of the electronic box.
2D0Hex Indices: i001: Pos1: Software version of the PCB in position 1 (left)
i002: Pos2: Software version of the PCB in position 2 (right)
i003: Pos3: Software version of the PCB in position 3 (center)
i004: Text: Software version of the text EPROM in position 1
Note: The TSY board has no software code; the reported code is always
'0.0'
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1 PcD Gr.: 0
r721 SW Generat.Date 3 3 /U BR
Software generation date of the CU board.
2D1Hex Indices: i001= Year: Year
i002= Mon.: Month
i003= Day: Day
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r722 SW ID 4 3 /U BR
Expanded software version code of the PCBs in positions 1 to 3 of the
2D2Hex electronic box.
Indices: i001: Pos1: Software code of the PCB in position 1 (left)
i002: Pos2: Software code of the PCB in position 2 (right)
i003: Pos3: Software code of the PCB in position 3 (center)
i004: Text: Software code of the text EPROM in position 1
Note: The TSY board has no software code; the reported code is always
'0.0'
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1 PcD Gr.: 0
r723 PCB Code 3 3 /U BR
Identification code of the PCBs in positions 1 to 3 of the electronic box.
2D3Hex Indices: i001: Pos1: PCB code of the PCB in position 1 (left)
i002: Pos2: PCB code of the PCB in position 2 (right)
i003: Pos3: PCB code of the PCB in position 3 (center)
PCB codes: CU: 100 - 109
CB: 140 - 149
TB: 130 - 139
SCB: 120 - 129
TSY: 110 - 119
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r725 CalcTimeHeadroom - 3 / BR
Calculation time headroom of the CU board CPU in % of the computing [%]
2D5Hex power; influenced by sampling time (P308) and pulse frequency (P761) (not
vor VC), as well as the number activated unit functions.
Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=16384%
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0% PcD Gr.: 0

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-51

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
r730 SCB Diagnosis 16 3 / H BR
SCB diagnosis (all values in HEX display).
2DAHex Displayed numbers have an overflow at FF.
The meaning of several Indices depends of the selected SCB protocol
(P682).
Indices:
i001: flTC Number of error-free telegrams
i002: Terr Number of error telegrams
i003: Voff USS: Number of Byte-Frame-errors
SCI boards: number of slave power outages
i004: Toff USS: Number of Overrun-errors
SCI boards: number of fiber optic link interrupts
i005: PnoS USS: Parity error
SCI boards: number of missing answer telegrams
i006: STxL USS: STX-error
SCI boards: number of search telegrams to accept a slave
i007: ETX ETX-error
i008: BcCC USS: Block-Check-error
SCI boards: number of configuration telegrams
i009: L/Te USS/Peer to Peer: incorrect telegram length
SCI modules: required maximum number of terminals
according to process data wiring (P554 to P631) .
i010: T/An USS: Timeout
SCI modules: required analog inputs / outputs according to
process data wiring of the setpoint channel and actual value
output via SCI (P664) .
i011: Res1 Reserve
i012: Res2 Reserve
i013: Warn SCB/DPR warning word
i014: Sl1? Information, if slave 1 needed and if yes, which type
0: no slave 1 needed
1: SCI1
2: SCI2
i015: Sl2? Information, if slave 2 needed and if yes, which type
0: no slave 2 needed
1: SCI1
2: SCI2
i016: IniF: with 'SCI modules': initialization fault
Type=L2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r731 CB/TB Diagnosis 32 3 / H BR
For detailed information see manuals of the used communication or
2DBHex technology boards.
Type=L2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P733 Simulated OPerat 0 to 1 - 3 / BR
* Simulated operation, allows test operation of the drive with de-energized DC 0 3/ B
2DDHex bus.
Parameter values: 0: no simulated operation off
1: simulated operation on
Conditions: • 24 V auxiliary power supply must be provided
• Drive must be connected to the mains via a main
contactor, which is driven by the drive (see P612)
Note: Simulated operation can only be selected, when the DC bus voltage
(r006) is less than 5% of the rated DC bus voltage
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
r743 Fault n/f(act) - 2 / BR
Frequency / speed actual value (r218) at time of tripping [Hz]
2E7Hex Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1
r744 Fault dn/dt - 2 / BR
Change of frequency / speed per sec at time of tripping [Hz]
2E8Hex Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.01Hz PcD Gr.: 1

11-52 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
r745 Fault Isq(act) - 2 / BR
Actual value of the torque generating current component (r264) at time of [A]
2E9Hex tripping
Type=I2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1A PcD Gr.: 2
r746 Fault Out Volts - 2 / BR
Actual value of the drive output voltage (r003) at time of tripping [V]
2EAHex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1V PcD Gr.: 3
r747 Fault CtrlStatus - 2 / BR
Status of the control circuit (r150) at time of tripping
2EBHex Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r748 TriP Time 24 2 / BR
Trip times (operating hour meter values, r013)
2ECHex Indices: Day Hours Seconds
latest trip (1) i001=T1-d i002=T1-h i003=T1-s
last reset trip(2) i004=T2-d i005=T2-h i006=T2-s
(last+1) reset trip (3) i007=T3-d i008=T3-h i009=T3-s
...
oldest saved trip (8) i022=T8-d i023=T8-h i024=T8-s
Trip description by: r947 Fault number
r949 Fault value
r951 list of fault numbers
P952 number of faults
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-53

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

11.13 Modulator
PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_
[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P761 Pulse Frequency 1.5 to 16.0 2 3 / ABR
Pulse frequency at asynchronous space vector modulation [kHz] i001=3.0 3/ A
2F9Hex Description for setting: i002=3.0
The setting range of the pulse frequency depends of the type of the drive
ATTTENTION: if the pulse frequency is increased, the maximum current
(P173) may be reduced. If afterwards the pulse frequency is
reduced again, the value of P173 will not be changed back.
Note: the setting range of this parameter is also influenced by P092 (output
filter).
For active noise damping (P762 > 0), the pulse frequency is limited to
min. 45*rated motor frequency (P107), otherwise to 30*P107.
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1kHz PcD: 4000HEX=16.384kHz
P762 SIMO Sound 0 to 4 2 3 / BR
changes the noise characteristics of the motor; at low pulse frequencies this i001=0 3 / BR
2FAHex may result in a noise reduction i002=0
As a result of increased harmonics, when this function is activated, a
minimum pulse frequency P761 must be set to 45*rated motor frequency.
Only then can SIMO-Sound be enabled.
Description for setting:
the motor noise is significantly influenced by mechanical oscillations of the
drive system; for that reason several settings must be tested.
Parameter values: 0: not active OFF
1: sound steps 1 Sound 1
2: sound steps 2 Sound 2
3: sound steps 3 Sound 3
4: sound steps 4 Sound 4
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P763 Max ModulatDePth 20.0 to 96.0 2 3 / BR
Maximum depth of modulation of the modulator; defines the maximum [%] i001=96.0 3 / BR
2FBHex possible output voltage i002=96.0
Description for Setting:
• High output voltages can be reached by using the edge modulation mode
at a high depth of modulation. Low parameter values prevent the change
from space vector to edge modulation mode, the reachable output voltage
is lower.
• The depth of modulation at the change from space vector to edge
modulation mode depends of the type of the drive.
• Typical values @ 3 kHz are:
for a rated drive current <= 186 A: about 87%
for a rated drive current > 186 A: about 84%.
• The change to edge modulation can be prevented via P769.
Note: if a sine wave output filter is used (P092 = 1) the maximum depth of
modulation is so far reduced, that the modulator only operates in
space vector modulation mode. The effective modulation depth limit is
displayed in P180.
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1% PcD: 4000HEX=400%
r764 Modulation DePth - 3 / BR
Depth of modulation of the modulator [%]
2FCHex Analog Output: 100% @ Parameter Value=1638.4%
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=0.1% PcD: 4000HEX=400%

11-54 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P769 ModSystemRelease 0 to 3 2 3 / ABR
Releases edge modulation systems. i001=0 3/ A
301Hex Parameter values: 0: all systems all syst. i002=0
1: edge modulation systems above 60 Hz FLM from 60 Hz
2: adge modulation systems above 100 Hz FLM from 100 Hz
3: no edge modulation systems no FLM
Note: If needed the modulation depth limit (P763) is automatically reduced if
edge modulation is de-selected.
MDS(2) Parameter
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P770 Deadtime comp. 0 to 1 - 3 / BR
Selects the deadtime compensation in the gating unit. 1 3 / BR
302Hex The deadtime compensation eliminates voltage errors, which are obtained by
the interlock times in the gating unit.
Compensation is enabled/disabled during automatic parameter setting
(P052 = 6) and during automatic motor identification (P052 = 7, 8).
Parameter values: 0: No deadtime compensation in the gating unit off
1: Deadtime compensation enabled in the gating unit on
Setting instructions:
• For high pulse frequencies, for motors with low stator time constant (r274,
positioning drives) and for long feeder cables, it may be practical to
disable the compensation in order to improve the smooth running
characteristics at low speeds.
• In order to compensate the steady-state error in the stator resistance, for
vector control types (P163 = 3, 4, 5), an addition transistor voltage is
automatically internally added. The current controller dynamic
performance is simultaneously increased. For frequency control (P163 =
3), the resonant damping P300 could also be additionally reduced.
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX: = 0.01 µs PcD Gr.: 0

11.14 Factory Parameters

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_
[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P789 RAM Access Value 0 to 65535 - 3 / BR
Value of the memory cell of the CU 0 4 / BR
315Hex Type=L2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P799 SPecial Access 0 to 65535 - 3 / BR
* Parameter for special access 0 3 / BR
31FHex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0

11.15 Special Parameters

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_
[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P899 OP setting − 1 /UHABR
Is used to set the drive converter address when several drive converters are 1 /UHABR
383Hex
controlled from one OP.
Note: The parameter can only be displayed at the OP.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-55

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

11.16 Profile Parameters

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_
[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
P918 CB Bus Address 0 to 126 - 3 / H BR
Protocol depending bus address for communication boards; see manual of 3 3/H
396Hex these boards
Note: The communication board checks, if the set value is valid. If the value
is not accepted, the fault message 80 is issued with fault value 5
Condition: P090 = 1 or P091 = 1 (communication board installed)
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P927 Parameter Access 0 to 31 - 3 / BR
* Release of interfaces for the parameterization; description see P053. 6 3 / BR
39FHex
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P928 Src Base/Reserve 0 to 5001 - 3 / BR
* Source of the switching command 'base / reserve settings' (control word 2, bit 1005 3 / BR
3A0Hex 30); parameter is identical with P590 - description there
Type=L2; PKW: PKW-Format(HEX)=Par Value PcD Gr.: 0
r947 Fault Memory 64 2 / BR
Display of the faults which have occurred at the last 8 trips (r748); at every
3B3Hex trip up to 8 faults can be saved, related to each of them a fault number (see
list of faults, chapter 7) is related. For text display of the faults see r951.
Indices:
Fault 1 Fault 2 ... Fault 8
latest trip (1) i001=F1-1 i002=F1-2 ... i008=F1-8
last reset trip (2) i009=F2-1 i010=F2-2 ... i016=F2-8
(last+1) reset trip (3) i017=F3-1 i018=F3-2 ... i024=F3-8
...
oldest saved trip (8) i057=F8-1 i058=F8-2 ... i064=F8-8
Notes: A value of '0' means 'no fault'
During a power outage only the actual and the last reset trips are
saved. Indices 17 to 64 are reset to '0'.
Number of saved trips: see P952.
Example of a trip:
last reset trip (2)
Index r947 r949 Index r748

9 35 0 4 62

10 37 2 5 1

11 0 0 6 7

12

13

14

15

16

Trip time (r748): after 62 days, 1 hour, 7 sec of operation

Faults (r947): Fault value (r949):
35 not defined
37 2
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r949 Fault Value 64 3 / BR
Fault values of the faults; allows a more detailed diagnosis at several faults.
3B5Hex The fault values are saved in the same indices as the related fault numbers
(r947) - see example at P947.
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0

11-56 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
r951 Fault Texts 116 2 / BR
List of fault texts; every fault text is saved in the index equivalent to its fault
3B7Hex number.
Example (see P947): Value of P947, i09 is '35'.
The related fault was (P951, i35): 'Ext. Fault1'.
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P952 # of Faults 0 to 8 - 2 / BR
* Number of saved trips (max. 8). 0 2 / BR
3B8Hex If the parameter is set to '0', the diagnosis memory (r748 - trip times, r947 -
fault number, r949 fault value) is cleared.
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
r953 Warning Param1 - 3 / BR
If a warning (numbers 1 to 16) is active, the related bar in the display is ON
3B9Hex 16 14 12 10
15 13 11 9
8 6 4 2
7 5 3 1

Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0

r954 Warning Param2 - 3 / BR
If a warning (numbers 17 to 32) is active, the related bar in the display is ON
3BAHex 32 30 28 26
31 29 27 25
24 22 20 18
23 21 19 17

Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0

r955 Warning Param3 - 3 / BR
If a warning (numbers 33 to 48) is active, the related bar in the display is ON
3BBHex 48 46 44 42
47 45 43 41
40 38 36 34
39 37 35 33

Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0

r956 Warning Param4 - 3 / BR
If a warning (numbers 49 to 64) is active, the related bar in the display is ON
3BCHex 64 62 60 58
63 61 59 57
56 54 52 50
55 53 51 49

Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0

r957 Warning Param5 - 3 / BR
If a warning (numbers 65 to 80) is active, the related bar in the display is ON
3BDHex 80 78 76 74
79 77 75 73
72 70 68 66
71 69 67 65

Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0

r958 Warning Param6 - 3 / BR
If a warning (numbers 81 to 96) is active, the related bar in the display is ON
3BEHex 96 94 92 90
95 93 91 89
88 86 84 82
87 85 83 81

Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0

r959 Warning Param7 - 3 / BR
If a warning (numbers 97 to 112 is active, the related bar in the display is ON
3BFHex 112 110 108 106
111 109 107 105
104 102 100 98
103 101 99 97

Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-57

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Parameter list 08.96

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
r960 Warning Param8 - 3 / BR
If a warning (numbers 113 to 128) is active, the related bar in the display is ON
3C0Hex 128 126 124 122
127 125 123 121
120 118 116 114
119 117 115 113

Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0

r964 Drive ID - 3 / BR
Drive ID
3C4Hex Text string; contains information about the ID# (first 2 bytes of the string, used
to identify the drive by Profibus) and about the drive type name (last 24 bytes
of the string, used for display in visualization systems).
A further 24 characters contain the software release and the date the
software was generated
Parameter values:
2 Bytes: ID#: 8022Hex
24 Byte: model name according to the drive type:
MASTER DRIVES FC
24 Byte: Software release and date that the software was generated
V1.3 day.month.year
Note: The parameter cannot be selected at the PMU; for OP, the value
cannot be displayed.
Type=VS; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r965 Profile # - 3 / BR
PROFIBUS specific parameter
3C5Hex Note: The parameter cannot be selected at the PMU; for OP, the value
cannot be displayed.
Type=OS; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r967 Control Word 1 - 2 / BR
Display parameter of control word 1 (bit 0-15)
3C7Hex Identical with r550 (control word 1)
Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r968 Status Word 1 - 2 / BR
Display parameter of status word 1 (bit 0 - 15)
3C8Hex Identical with r552 (status word 1)
Type=V2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
P970 Factory Settings 0 to 1 - 3/ B
* Parameter reset to factory settings 1 3/ B
3CAHex Parameter values:
0: Parameter reset: all parameters are reset to their original values (factory FactSetting
settings); after this the parameter is reset to '1'.
1: no parameter reset Return
Note: This function can also be selected via P052=1.
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -
P971 EEPROM Saving 0 to 1 - 3 / BR
* Saves parameter values in the EEPROM with a transition of the parameter 0 3 / BR
3CBHex value from 0 to 1.
The parameter must be manually reset to ‘0’.
Parameter values: 0: no saving of parameter values
1: a transition from 0 to 1 saves the RAM values to the
EEPROM
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: -

11-58 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Parameter list

PNU Parameter Name in OP1 Range # of. Indices read: _/_

[Unit] Factory write: _/_
*:conf-P Description Value texts Settings.
r980 Par # List Pt1 116 3 / BR
List of the available parameter numbers; part 1
3D4Hex The parameter numbers are listed in a positive sequence.
The first existing '0' shows, that no more parameter numbers are available.
Index range: 1 to 116.
As special function the value of i116 is the number of the parameter which
contains the next following part of the list. If i116 has a value of '0' then there
are no more parts of the list.
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r981 Par # List Pt2 116 3 / BR
List of the available parameter numbers; part 2; see r980.
3D5Hex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r982 Par # List Pt3 116 3 / BR
List of the available parameter numbers; part 3; see r980.
3D6Hex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r983 Par # List Pt4 116 3 / BR
List of the available parameter numbers; part 4; see r980.
3D7Hex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r984 Par # List Pt5 116 3 / BR
List of the available parameter numbers; part 5; see r980.
3D8Hex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r985 Par # List Pt6 116 3 / BR
List of the available parameter numbers; part 6; see r980.
3D9Hex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r986 Par # List Pt7 116 3 / BR
List of the available parameter numbers; part 7; see r980.
3DAHex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r987 Par # List Pt8 116 3 / BR
List of the available parameter numbers; part 8; see r980.
3DBHex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r988 Par # List Pt9 116 3 / BR
List of the available parameter numbers; part 9; see r980.
3DCHex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r989 Par # List Pt10 116 3 / BR
List of the available parameter numbers; part 10; see r980.
3DDHex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r990 Par # List chg1 116 3 / BR
List of the changed parameters; part 1
3DEHex The parameter numbers are listed in a positive sequence.
The first existing '0' shows, that no more parameter numbers are available.
Index range: 1 to 116.
As special function the value of i116 is the number of the parameter which
contains the next following part of the list. If i116 has a value of '0' then there
are no more parts of the list.
Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r991 Par # List chg2 116 3 / BR
List of the changed parameters; part 2; see r990.
3DFHex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0
r992 Par # List chg3 116 116 3 / BR
List of the changed parameters; part 3; see r990.
3E0Hex Type=O2; PKW: 1HEX=1.0 PcD Gr.: 0

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 11-59

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Fault and alarm messages

12 Fault and alarm messages

12.1 Fault messages

For each fault the following information is available:
Parameter r947 Fault number
r949 Fault value
r951 Fault list
P952 Number of faults
r748 Fault time

If a fault code is not reset before the electronic supply is switched off, then the fault code will be present again,
when the electronic supply is switched on again. The unit cannot be operated without resetting the fault
message. (Exeption: Automatic restart has been selected, see P366).
Fault messages
No. Fault description Counter measures

F001 Contact. chckbck. P591 S.MC chckbck. sign.,

If a main contactor checkback signal is configured, a The parameter value must match the main contactor checkback signal
checkback signal was not received within 500 ms after the connection. Check the main contactor checkback signal circuit.
power-up command. + Section "Connecting-up" in the Operating Instructions, Part 1.
F002 Pre-charging Check the supply voltage,
When pre-charging, the minimum DC link voltage (P071 Compare with P071 Conv. supply volt..
Conv. supply voltage ∗ 1.34) of 80 % was not reached.
The maximum pre-charging time of 3 s was exceeded.
F006 DC link overvoltage Check the supply voltage or the input DC voltage
The unit was shutdown due to an excessive DC link The converter operates in the regenerative mode without regenerative
voltage. possibility.
Supply voltage - I DC voltage range I Shutdown threshold If the converter supply voltage is at the upper tolerance limit and it is
208 V - 230 V I 280 V - 310 V I 412 V operating under full load conditions, F006 can also be initiated when a
380 V - 460 V I 510 V - 620 V I 819 V line phase fails.
500 V - 575 V I 675 V - 780 V I 1022 V Possibly;
660 V - 690 V I 890 V - 930 V I 1220 V • P464 increase decelaration time,
• P377 activate the V(d,max)-Controller (first check P071)
• P370 decrease the speed catch speed.
F008 DC link uvolt. Check
The lower limit of 76 % of the DC link voltage (P071 Line • the supply voltage P071 Line Volts
Volts ∗ 1.34) was fallen below. For enabled kinetic • of the input rectifier
buffering, 61 %.
• of the DC link
DC link undervoltage in ‘standard’ operation (i.e. no
SIMULATION).
DC link undervoltage with active kinetic buffering and
speed less than 10 % of the rated motor speed.
It was a ‘brief supply failure’ which was only detected after
the supply returned (WEA-flag).
F011 Overcurrent Check
The unit was shutdown due to an overcurrent condition. • the converter-output for short-circuit or ground fault
• the load for an overload condition
The shutdown threshold was exceeded,
• whether the motor and converter are correctly matched
• whether the dynamic requirements are too high.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 12-1

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Fault and alarm messages 08.96

Fault messages
No. Fault description Counter measures
F015 Motor stall. reduce the load
Motor has stalled or is locked: release the brake
as a result of excessive ramp- or ramp-down times, a load increase the current limit
change which was too fast and too high, or an excessive
increase P520 stall time
steady-state load.
Increase P517 response threshold for the setpoint-actual value
The fault is only generated after a time, entered in P520.
deviation
The identification as to whether the drive has been locked
or stalled, is dependent on P517 (setpoint-actual value ♦ only for V/f control with speed regulator: (P163 = 0)
deviation) and P518. For V/f control, the I(max) regulator • check for interrupted tachometer cable
must be activated (P175). • check the pulse encoder pulse number
For closed-loop speed regulation, a condition is that the • check the analog tachometer normalization
speed controller limit has been reached (r150 bit7, bit8)
before this fault is initiated.
F017 Motor not found Power-up - after coast down. If required, increase P369,
Motor was not found (for restart on the fly with tachometer). Restart search current

F018 F set restart Check the supplementary setpoint.

The found set-frequency was not able to be implemented, Power-up after the motor has coasted to a stop.
as the supplementary setpoint is too high.
F021 Motor I2t Check: P363 Mot. temp.T1
2
Parameterized limit value of the I t-monitoring for the motor
was exceeded.
F023 Inverter temp. Measure the air intake and ambient temperature. Please observe the
The temperature limit of the inverter has been exceeded. derating curves“ for ϑ >40 ºC.
+ Section "Technical data" in the Operating Instructions, Part 1
r949 = 1 The temperature limit of the inverter has been Check;
exceeded. • whether fan -E1 is connected and is rotating in the correct direction.
r949 = 2 Sensor 1: Wire break in the sensor wire or • that the air entry and discharge openings are not restricted.
sensor is defect • temperature sensor at -X30
r949 = 18 Sensor 2: Wire break in the sensor wire or
sensor is defect
r949 = 34 Sensor 3: Wire break in the sensor wire or
sensor is defect
r949 = 50 Sensor 4: Wire break in the sensor wire or
sensor is defect
F025 UCE ph. L1 Check;
There was an UCE shutdown in phase L1. • phase L1 for short-circuit or ground fault
(-X2:U2 including motor).
• that the CU is correctly inserted.
F026 UCE ph. L2 Check;
There was an UCE shutdown in phase L2. • phase L2 for short-circuit or ground fault
(-X2:V2 including motor).
• that the CU is correctly inserted.
F027 UCE ph. L3 Check;
There was an UCE-shutdown in phase L3. • phase L3 for short circuit or ground fault.
(-X2:W2 -including motor).
• that the CU is correctly inserted.
F028 Supply phase Check the supply voltage
The frequency and amplitude of the DC link ripple indicates
a single phase supply failure.

12-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Fault and alarm messages

Fault messages
No. Fault description Counter measures
F029 Meas. val. sens. Defective measured value sensing
The measured value sensing system has developed a Defective power section(valve cannot block)
fault.
• (r949 = 1) Offset adjustment not possible in phase L1.
• (r949 = 2) Offset adjustment not possible in phase L3.
• (r949 = 3) Offset adjustment not possible in phases
L1and L3.
F035 Ext. fault1 Check;
External fault 1 input, which can be parameterized, was • if there is an external fault
activated. • if the cable to the appropriate binary input is interrupted
• P575 S k fault ext.1
+ Section "Binary inputs" in the Operating Instructions, Part 2
F036 Ext. fault2 Check;
External fault 2 input, which can be parameterized, was • if there is an external fault
activated. • if the cable to the appropriate binary input is interrupted
• P586 S.k. fault ext. 1
+ Section „Binary inputs“ in the Operating Instructions, Part 2
F037 Analog input. Check the connection to • analog input -X102:27, 28, 29.
• analog input 2 -X102:30 ,31, 32.
check parameters • P650 CU-AE configuration
• P651 CU-AE smoothing
• P652 CU-AE offset
+ Section "Control terminal strip and serial interface" in the Operating
Instructions, Part 2
F040 AS internal Replace the CU board (-A10)
Incorrect operating status.
F041 EEprom fault Replace the CU board (-A10)
A fault occured when storing the values in the EEPROM.

F042 Comp. time Reduce computation time load, increase sampling time P308
Computation time problems observe r725 , free comp time

F043 Coupling, int. Replace the CU board (-A10)

Internal coupling error. One of the two coupling partners
does not respond
F045 Opt.brd HW Replace CU
A hardware fault occurred when accessing the option Check the connection between the subrack and option boards
board
F046 Par. con. Power the converter off and up again.
Replace CU board (-A10).

F047 Int. comp. time Replace CU board (-A10).

F048 Int. pulse fr. Change P761 pulse frequency.

F049 SW release • Replace language PROM

The EPROMs on the CU have different software releases.
In this case, the language EPROM is compared with the
CU software.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 12-3

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Fault and alarm messages 08.96

Fault messages
No. Fault description Counter measures
F050 TSY init. Check;
Error when initializing the TSY board • is the TSY board correctly inserted
• does the parameter setting coincide with the boards used
P090 board, slot 2 - P091 board, slot 3
r723 board code - 724 board ID
F053 Tacho dn/dt Check the tacho feeder cables to ensure that they are intact. Check the
The permissible change value of the speed encoder signal tachometer screen ground.
P215 dn(actual, permissible) was exceeded. If required, change P215
F060 MLFB missing After acknowledgement, in INITIALIZATION enter the correct MLFB in
This is set, if the MLFB = 0 when INITIALIZATION is parameter P070 MLFB (6SE70..). (Only possible with the appropriate
exitted (0.0 kW). MLFB = Order No. access stages to both access parameters).

F061 Incorr param. Acknowledge the fault, and change the appropriate parameter value.
A parameter entered when setting the drive is not in the The erroneous parameter is specified in r949 as fault value.
admissible range (e.g. P107 mot. frequency (ies), P108
mot. speed (s)), P761 pulse frequency) (dependent on the
control type).
F065 INT1 telegram • Check the connection CU -X100:1 to 5. and check the connection
A telegram was not received at interface 1 (SST1/USS PMU -X300.
protocol) during the telegram failure time • Check P687.01“SST/SCB TLG-fail“
• Replace CU (-A10).
F070 SCB init. r 949 =1 or 2
Error when initializing the SCB board • Check the SCB board to ensure that it is correctly inserted and
that the slot coincides with assignment
• r723 board code , − r724 board ID and
• P090 board slot 2, − P091 board slot 3
r 949 =5 error, initialization data
• Check parameters P682 and P684
r 949=6 time-out when initializing and
r949=10 error, configuration channel
• Check parameters P090, P091, P682 and P684
F072 SCB heartb. Replace SCB
SCB no longer processes the monitoring counter Check the connection between the subrack and option board
(heartbeat counter)
F073 Aninput1 SL1 Check the connection, signal source to the SCI 1 board
4 mA at analog input 1, slave 1 fallen below (slave 1) -X428:4, 5.

F074 Aninput2 SL1 Check the connection, signal source to the SCI 1 board
4 mA at analog input 2, slave 1 fallen below (slave 2) -X428:7, 8.

F075 Aninput3 SL1 Check the connection, signal source to the SCI 1 board
4 mA at analog input 3, slave 1 fallen below (slave 3) -X428:10, 11.

F076 Aninput1 SL2 Check the connection, signal source to the SCI1
4 mA at analog input 1, slave 2 fallen below (slave1) -X428:4, 5.

F077 Aninput2 SL2 Check the connection, signal source to the SCI 1 board
4 mA at analog input 2, slave 2 fallen below (slave 2) -X428:7,8.

F078 Aninput3 SL2 Check the connection, signal source to the SCI 1 board
4 mA at analog input 3, slave 2 fallen below (slave 3) -X428:10, 11.

F079 SCB telegram • Check the connections of SCB1(2).

A telegram was not received from the SCB (USS, peer-to- • Check P687.01“SST/SCB TLG-fail“.
peer, SCI) during the telegram failure time. • Replace SCB1(2).
• Replace CU (-A10).

12-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Fault and alarm messages

Fault messages
No. Fault description Counter measures
F080 TB/CB init. r949 = 1 PT/CB not inserted or PT/CB board code incorrect
Error when initializing the board at the DPR interface r949 = 2 PT not compatible
r949 = 3 CB not compatible
r949 = 4 error, initialization data
Check the T300/CB board to ensure that is correctly inserted and that
the slot and assignment coincide;
• P090 board slot 2, • P091 board slot 3
• r723 board code, •r724 board ID
r949 = 5 time-out at initialization
r949 = 10 error, configuration channel
Checking the CB initialization parameters;
• P918 CB bus address,
• 696 to P705 CB parameters 1 to 10
F081 TB/CB heartb Replace TB or CB
TB or CB no longer processes the heartbeat counter Check the connection between the subrack and option boards

F082 TB/CB Tlgr. • Check the connections of the CB/TB.

No new process data were received from TB or CB during • Check P695 “CB/TB TLG-fail“.
the telegram failure. . • Replace CB.
• Replace TB.
F100 GRND init The fault cause can be read-out of r358 "ground fault test result".
During the ground fault test, a current not equal to 0 was Check the converter output for short-circuit or ground fault
measured, or a UCE or the overcurrent monitoring (-X2:U2, V2, W2 - including motor).
responded, although none of the valves were triggered. Check that the CU board is correctly inserted.
Frame sizes 1 and 2:
Check the transistor modules on the PEU board -A23 for short-circuit.
Frame sizes 3 and 4:
Check the transistor modules -A100, -A200, -A300 for a short-circuit
condition.
F101 GRND UCE Check the power section valves for a short-circuit, and for converters
During the ground fault test a UCE monitoring function with fiber-optic gating, the gating unit wiring and the UCE checkback
responded in a phase in which no valve was triggered signals, for the correct assignment.
r358 can be interrogated to indicate which UCE monitoring has
responded.
F102 GRND phase Read-out the fault value from R949. The digit of the xth position
During the ground fault test, current flowed in one phase indicates the valve, where the fault occured at power-up.
where none of the valves were triggered, or the UCE Digit x = 1 = L2+ x = 2 = L2− x = 3 = L1+
monitoring in the phase responded in which the valve was x = 4 = L1− x = 5 = L3+ x = 6 = L3−
triggered.
The digit of the xth position defines the phase, in which I f is 0, and thus
a valve is defective (always conductive)
Digit x = 1 = Phase 1
Digit x = 3 = Phase 3
Digit x = 4 = Phase 1 and 3
Check the phase assembly for defective valves (always conductive)

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 12-5

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Fault and alarm messages 08.96

Fault messages
No. Fault description Counter measures
F103 Ground fault Read-out the fault value from r949. The digit of the xth position
An earth fault or a fault in the power section is present. specifies the valve, which, when triggered, manifested the fault.
During the ground fault test, a current flows from the phase x = 1 = V+ x = 2 = V- x = 3 = U+
in which a valve was triggered, the overcurrent comparitor x = 4 = U- x = 5 = W+ x = 6 =W-
responded, or a UCE monitoring in a phase has responded
in which a valve was triggered. Check the motor including feeder cable for ground faults. If there is no
ground fault, check the power section for defective valves which remain
conductive.
The digit of the xth position defines the phase in which I f is 0, and
therefore a valve must be defective (always conductive).
1 = Current in phase 1 (
2 = UCE in phase 2 (V)
3 = Current in phase 3 (W
4 = Only overcurrent
The motor speed should be less than 10 % of the rated speed during
the ground fault test!
1) A ground fault is present in phase V, or there is a defective valve
(always conductive).
F104 Mess. I pol. Read-out the fault value from r949. The digit of the xth position
For the resistance measurement, the average current specifies the valve, which, when triggered, manifested the fault.
value in a phase has the incorrect polarity. x = 1 = 100 x = 2 =010 x = 3 = 001

Specifies the phase current with the incorrect polarity.

x = 1 = Phase 1 (U)
x = 3 = Phase 3 (W)
x = 4 = Phase 1 (U) and 3

Check that the output current is flowing through the CT in the correct
direction, and whether the CT signal cables are connected with the
correct polarity to the electronics. The CT could be defective.
F105 Mess. I too large Read-out the fault value from r949. The digit of the xth position
Phase current deviates by more than 15 % from the specifies the voltage direction when the fault occurred.
setpoint. x = 1 = 100 x = 2 =010 x = 3 = 001

The digit of the xth position specifies the phase current, which is higher
than can be expected for this particular current setpoint.
x = 1 = Phase 1 (U)
x = 3 = Phase 3 (W)
x = 4 = Phase 1 (U) and 3

Check whether the motor-converter feeder cable or the motor winding

in phase 2 are interrupted, and that both CTs represent the actual value
with the correct gain.
F106 Mess. I dev. Check whether the motor-converter feeder cable or the motor winding
Phase current deviates by more than 15 % from the in phase 2 are interrupted, and that both CTs represent the actual value
setpoint. with the correct gain. The referred stator- and feeder resistances are
possibly >50 %.
For the resistance measurement, the measured phase current was
more than 15 % of the value for this particular setpoint

12-6 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Fault and alarm messages

Fault messages
No. Fault description Counter measures
F107 Mess. I = 0 Read-out the fault value from r949. The digit of the xth position
During the resistance measurement, current was not specifies the voltage direction at which the fault occurred.
measured in one phase, although the inverter was enabled. x = 1 = 100 x = 2 =010 x = 3 = 001

The digit of the xth position indicates the phase, in which no current
was measured.
x = 1 = Phase 1 (U)
x = 2 = Phase 2 (V)
x = 3 = Phase 3 (W)
x = 4 = Phase 1 (U) and 3 (W)

Check that all three motor feeder cables and motor windings are not
interrupted. Check the connections between the CT and electronics.
Check that the correct rating plate data have been entered for the
motor data set valid during the measurement.
F108 Mess. unsym Check the motor feeder cables and motor winding.
At least one of the six individual values from Rg deviate by
more than 10 % from the average value. The motor winding
is significantly non-symmetrical.
F114 Mess. OFF For P052, function selection = 7, restart motor identification at
The converter automatically aborted the automatic standstill. The on command must be provided within 20 s after the
measurement as the time limit was exceeded up to warning message A078 standstill measurement appears.
converter power-up, or due to an OFF command during the Withdraw the off command and re-start the measurement.
measurement; the selection in P052 function selection is
reset.
F115 KF internal Power-down the converter and electronics and power-up again.
F255 Fault in the NOVRAM Power-down the converter and electronics and power-up again.
If the fault occurs again, change the CU.

Fatal errors (FF):

Fatal errors are those hardware or software errors which no longer permit normal converter operation. They
only appear on the PMU in the form "FF<Nr>". The software is re-booted by actuating any PMU key.
Power-down the converter and power-up again. Call the respon-
FFxx Error message
sible service department if a fatal error message is re-displayed.
FF01 Time sector overflow • Increase the sampling time (P308) or reduce the pulse frequency
A non-removable time sector overflow was identified in the (P761)
higher priority time sectors. • replace CU
FF03 Access error, option board • replace CU
A fatal error occured when accessing the external option • replace LBA
boards (CB, TB, SCB, TSY ..) • replace option board
FF06 Stack-Overflow • Increase the sampling time (P308) or reduce the pulse frequency
Stack overflow. (P761)
• replace CU
FFxx Other fatal errors. • replace CU

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 12-7

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Fault and alarm messages 08.96

12.2 Alarm messages

The alarm message is periodically displayed on the PMU by A=alarm and a 3-digit number. An alarm cannot be
acknowledged. It is automatically deleted once the cause has been removed. Several alarms can be present.
The alarms are then displayed one after another.
When the converter is operated with the OP1 operator control panel, the alarm is indicated in the lowest
operating display line. The red LED additionally flashes (refer to the OP1 Instruction Manual).
Alarm Parameter
No. Description Counter-measures
No.

Bit No.
A001 P953 Comp. time observe r725 free computation time
 CU board comp. time utilization too high increase P308, sampling time or
0
A014 P953 Simulation • set P733 to zero
 The DC link voltage is not equal to zero when the
• drop the DC link voltage (remove the inverter from the
simulation mode is selected (P733 = 1).
13 mains)
A015 P953 Ext. alarm 1 External alarm! check whether the cable to the appropriate
 External alarm input 1, which can be parameterized, binary input is interrupted. Check parameter P588 S alarm
was activated ext. 1.
14
+ Section "Binary inputs" in the Operating Instructions,
Part 2
A016 P953 Ext. alarm 2 External alarm! check whether the cable to the appropriate
 External alarm input 2, which can be parameterized, binary input is interrupted. Check parameter P589 S alarm
was activated ext. 2.
15
+ Section "Binary inputs" in the Operating Instructions,
Part 2
A020 P954 Overcurrent Check the driven load for an overload condition.
 An overcurrent condition has occurred. - are the motor and converter matched
3 - are the dynamic performance requirements exceeded.
A021 P954 Overvoltage Check the supply voltage.
 A DC link overvoltage condition has occurred. Converter regenerates without regeneration possibility.
4
A022 P954 Inv. temp. Observe r011 conv. temp.
 The threshold for initiating an alarm, which can be Measure the air intake or ambient temperature. Observe
5 parameterized, was fallen below. the de-rating curves for ϑ >40 ºC
+ Section "Technical data" in the Operating Instructions,
Part 1
Check:
- whether fan -E1 is connected and is rotating in the
correct direction.
- the air intake and discharge openings for blockage.
- the temperature sensor at -X30.
A023 P954 Mot temp Check the motor (load, ventilation etc.). Read-out the
 The threshold to initialize an alarm, which can be actual temperature in r009 mot.temp.
parameterized, was exceeded. Check the KTY84 input at connector -X104:25,26 for a
6
short-circuit condition.
A025 P954 I2t- inv. Check whether the rated output current or the peak current
 If the instantaneous load condition is maintained, (operating class II) is (was) too high.
then the inverter will be thermally overloaded. View r010 conv. load
8
A029 P954 I2t motor Motor duty cycle is exceeded! Check parameters:
 The parameterized limit value for the motor I2t P362 motor cooling
12 monitoring was exceeded. P363 mot. temp. T1
P364 mot. load limits

12-8 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Fault and alarm messages

Alarm Parameter
No. Description Counter-measures
No.

Bit No.
A033 P955 Overspeed P519 overspeed hys. plus
 Bit in r553 status word 2 of the setpoint channel. P452 max. frequency ( RDF )/ max. speed (RDF) or
The speed actual value has exceeded the maximum P453 max. frequency ( LDF )/ max.speed (LDF) was
0 exceeded.
speed plus the selected hysteresis.
Increase the parameter for the maximum frequencies, or
reduce the regenerative load.
A034 P955 Setpoint- act. val. diff. Check;
 Bit in the r552 status word 2 of the setpoint - whether an excessive torque requirement is available.
channel. The absolute difference between the - whether the motor was dimensioned too small.
1
frequency setpoint and actual value is greater than increase P517 setpoint-act. val. diff. frq./setp. act. diff.
the parameterized value and the control monitoring speed or
time has expired. P518 setp.-act. val. diff. time,
A035 P955 Wire breakage Check, whether the cable(s) to the appropriate binary
 Clockwise and/or counter-clockwise rotating field is input(s),
not enabled, or a wire is interrupted (both control P572 S. clockwise phase sequence/P571 S. counter-
2
word bits are zero) clockwise phase sequence is (are) interrupted or
withdrawn.
+ Section "Binary inputs" in the Operating Instructions,
Part 2
A041 P955 DC link overv. Check:
 The supply voltage is too high or the converter - the supply voltage.
8 supply voltage (P071) is incorrectly parameterized. - P071 conv. supply volt.
The Vd_max. controller is inhibited, as otherwise the
motor would immediataly accelerate in operation up
to the maximum frequency.
A042 P955 Mot. stall/lock Reduce load.
 Motor has stalled or is locked. Check:
9 - whether the drive is locked.
- whether the drive has stalled.
A043 P955 n-act. jump Only for configured speed encoder
 The permissible rate of change of the speed encoder P208 S. speed act. val.
10 signal (P215) was exceeded.. Check!
Tacho cable for interruption.
Tacho screen grounding.
A049 P956 No slave P660 SCI AE config.
 For serial I/O (SCB1 with SCI1/2), no slave is • Check slave
0 connected, opto-cable interrupted or slaves have no • Check cable
power.
A050 P956 Slave incorrect Check P660 SCI AE config.
 For serial I/O, the slaves required according to the
1 parameterized configuration are not present (slave
number or slave type).
A051 P956 Peer bdrate Adapt the baud rate in conjunction with the SCB boards,
 The peer-to-peer connection is too high or different P684 SST/SCB baud rate
2 baud rates have been selected.

A052 P956 Peer PZD-L Reduce the number of words

 for peer-to-peer connection, PZD length selected too P686 SST/SCB PZD No.
3 high (>5).

A053 P956 Peer lng f.

 For peer-to-peer connection, the PZD length of Adapt the word length for sender and receiver
4 sender and receiver do not match. P686 SST/SCB PZD No.

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 12-9

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Fault and alarm messages 08.96

Alarm Parameter
No. Description Counter-measures
No.

Bit No.
A057 P956 TB-Param Change TB software
 Technology Board Parameter
occurs when a technology board is present, but
8
parameterisation commands from the PMU, SST1 or
SST2 are not answered by the technology board
within 6 seconds
A065 P957 WEA active
CAUTION
 The WEA option (P366) always restarts the drive. A
possibly parameterized power-up delay time (P367) Personnel could be endangered when
0
expires, if restart-on-the-fly is not selected. For DC the drive automatically restarts. Please
link pre-charging, there is no time monitoring, i.e. check as to whether WEA (automatic
with an external electronics power supply, it is also restart) is reeally required.
switched-in again. If required, change P366 WEA.

A070 P957 Sync. error

 This alarm is output, if the phase difference goes The alarm can only be deleted after synchronization has
outside the synchronizing window (P 391) after been exited
5
synchronization.

A076 P957 t-comp lim.

 The determined compensation time was limited to Converter and motor outputs are too different.
11 0.5µs - 1.5µs. Check motor data entries P100 to P109.

A077 P957 r-g limit

 The measured resistance is limited to the max. value Converter and motor outputs are too different.
12 of 49%. Check motor data entries P100 to P109.

A078 P957 Stands.meas

 The standstill measurement is executed when the If the standstill measurement can be executed without any
converter is powered-up. With this measurement, danger: Power-up the converter.
13
the motor can align itself several times in any
direction of rotation.

A081.. r958 CB alarm

A096  Refer to the User Manual, CB board
0...15
A097.. r959 TB alarm 1
A112  Refer to the User Manual, TB board
0...15
A113.. r960 TB alarm 2
A128  Refer to the User Manual, TB board
0...15

12-10 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Logbook

13 Logbook
The logbook must be kept up-to-date by the operating personnel
All service- and maintenance work carried-out on the converter should be briefly entered into the logbook.
Continuous entries are important for maintenance and could be significant when it comes to warranty claims.
The logbook is available as file on the SIMOVIS floppy disk supplied, Format File name
and it can be printed-out at any time.
WINWORD 6.0 LOG_FC.DOC
WRITE LOG_FC.WRI

Location: ..................................................... Unit Order No.:

Serial No.:
Date Name Department Signature

Start-up settings

Start-up settings
change

No. Date/time Name/department Fault- and diagnostic Measures

messages

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 13-1

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Index and Abbreviations

14 Index and Abbreviations

14.1 Index

Actual values ..................................................5-22 First start-up ..................................................... 4-2

Alarm messages .............................................12-8 Flexible response.............................................. 9-4

Analog input as setpoint input............................6-2 Function selection (P052) ................................. 8-1

Analog input as speed actual value input...........6-5 Functions (software) ......................................... 9-1

Analog inputs ....................................................6-2 General explanation of the terminology and

functional scope of the unit ............................... 3-1
Analog output....................................................6-7
Initialization (P052 = 2) ..................................... 8-2
Automatic parameterization (P052 = 6) .............8-6
Interfaces ......................................................... 6-1
Basic converter interface SST1 .........................6-9
KIP (Kinetic buffering)....................................... 9-3
Binary inputs .....................................................6-1
Limit value stage in front of the ramp-function
Binary outputs...................................................6-1 generator ........................................................ 6-13

Capacitor forming..............................................4-1 Logbook.......................................................... 13-1

Connecting-up the control cables ......................1-2 Main-, output contactor ..................................... 4-7

Connecting-up the parameterizing unit (PMU) ...1-4 Measures to maintain the radio interference
suppression regulations .................................... 1-5
Connectors for the control terminal strip ............1-1
motor identification at standstill (P052 = 7)........ 8-7
Control terminal strip and serial interface...........1-1
Open-loop and closed-loop control types .......... 7-1
Control word (control word 1 and control word 2)5-1
Operator control................................................ 2-1
Control word 1 (Visualization parameter r550 or
r967) .................................................................5-2 Operator control elements................................. 2-1

Control word 2 (Visualization parameter r551) ...5-3 Overview of the setpoints................................ 5-21

DC current brake...............................................9-8 Parameterization........................................ 4-3; 4-4

Displays ........................................................... 2-2 Process data .................................................... 5-1

Download (P052 = 3) ........................................8-4 Ramp-function generator (RFG) and limiting stage

in front of the ramp-function generator ............ 6-11
Dual port RAM (DPR for SCB, TSY, CB, TB) ..6-10
Ramp-function generator, RFG ....................... 6-11
Factory setting (P052 = 1).................................8-1
Restart-on-the-fly.............................................. 9-9
Fault and alarm messages ..............................12-1
Selecting the possible setpoints sources ......... 5-21
Fault messages...............................................12-1

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 14-1

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Index and Abbreviations 07.96

Selecting the source for control words 1 and 2 ..5-4 Status word .................................................... 5-12

Serial interfaces ................................................6-9 Status word 1 (visualization parameter r552 or

r968)............................................................... 5-13
Setpoints......................................................... 5-20
Status word 2 (visualization parameter r553) .. 5-14
Significance of control word- (1 and 2)
commands ........................................................5-6 Structure........................................................... 2-3

Significance of the status word messages ....... 5-15 Technology controller...................................... 9-11

Simple application examples for connecting Terminal connection ......................................... 1-3

process data with connection assignment ....... 4-10
V/f characteristic............................................... 7-1
Start-up.............................................................4-1
Vdmax closed-loop control................................ 9-7
Start-up after enabling additional software functions
or hardware options ..........................................4-9 WEA (automatic restart) ................................... 9-1

Start-up functions..............................................8-1

14-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Index and Abbreviations

14.2 List of abbreviations

A Alarm
AA Analog output
AC Alternating current
AE Analog input
AFE Active front end
AS Sequence control
ASIC Application specific integrated circuit
ASM Asynchronous motor
ATI Beliebig sinnvoll/sinnloser Kommentar
AWG American wire gauge
BA Binary output
BC Bypass contactor
BE Binary input
BF Type of construction
CAN Controller area network
CB Communication board (option)
CU Control unit
CUA Control unit AFE (control unit of AFE)
DC Direct current
DPR Dual-port-RAM
DPRAM Dual-port-RAM
EA First run-up
EEPROM Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive force
EPROM Erasable programmable read-only memory
ESD Electrostatic sensitive devices
F Fault
FC Frequency control (control version of SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES)
FF Fatal fault
FI Fault current
FSW Fixed setpoint
G/R Basic/reserve
GSST(1/2) Basic drive converter serial interface (1/2)
H High (binary signal level)
HLG Ramp-function generator
HTL High-voltage transistor logic

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 14-3

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
Index and Abbreviations 07.96

HW Hardware
I/O Input/output
IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor
IGD IGBT gate drive
IVI Inverter interface
KIP Kinetic buffering
L Low (binary signal level)
LBA Local bus adapter (option)
LED Light emitting diode
LSB Least significant bit
MC Main contactor
MDS Motor data set
MLFB Machine-readable product designation (machine-readable designation)
MSB Most significant bit
NN Sea level
OP(1) Operation panel (1)
Par Parameter
PC Personal computer
PEU Power electronic unit
PG Programming unit (programmer)
PKW Parameter ID value
PMU Parameterization unit
PROFIBUS Process field bus
PS Power supply
PSU Power supply unit
PWE Parameter value
PZD Process data
Q Source
RC Combination, resistor ® and capacitor (C)
RDS Reserve data set
RFG Ramp-function generator
SC Servo control (control version of SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES)
SCB(1/2) Serial communication board (option)
SCI(1/2) Serial communication Interface (1/2)
SDS Setpoint data set
SL Slave
SM Synchronous motor
SMD Surface mounted device

14-4 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
08.96 Index and Abbreviations

SML Snubber module low

SMU Snubber module up
SST1/2 Serial interface 1/2
SW Software
TB Technology board (option)
TLG Telegram
TRC Trace
TSY Tacho and synchronization (option)
TTL Transistor-Transistor-Logic
UCE Voltage (V) collector->emitter (desaturation signal of the transistors)
UMR Drive converter
USS Universal serial interface
VC Vector control (control version of SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES)
VDU Voltage-dividing-unit
VS Precharging contactor
Vsa Line supply voltage components in the a axis
Vsb Line supply voltage components in the b axis
VSB voltage sensing board (line supply voltage sensing board)
WEA Automatic restart function
WR Inverter
X9 Terminal strip on the PEU (types A to D), PSU1 (types E to H) and PSU2 (types J to M)
ZK DC link

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6XX10 14-5

SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Operating Instructions
The following editions have been published so far: Edition Internal Item Number
AA 475 100.4000.76 J AA-76

Version AA consists of the following chapters:

Version
Chapter Changes Pages
date
0 General First edition 10 08.96
1 Control terminal strip and serial interface First edition 5 08.96
2 Operator control First edition 4 08.96
3 General explanation of the terminology and functional scope First edition 2 08.96
of the unit
4 Start-up First edition 11 08.96
5 Process data First edition 23 08.96
6 Interfaces First edition 14 08.96
7 Open-loop and closed-loop control types First edition 3 08.96
8 Start-up functions First edition 8 08.96
9 Functions (software) First edition 13 08.96
10 Function diagrams First edition 8 08.96
11 Parameter list First edition 59 08.96
12 Fault and alarm messages First edition 10 08.96
13 Logbook First edition 1 08.96
14 Index and abbreviations First edition 5 08.96

Drives and Standard Products Group ASI 11

ASI
Variable-Speed Drives Division Antriebstechnik
System-Based
Postfach 3269, D-91050 Erlangen mit System
Drive Technology
Subject to change without notice Order-No. 6SE7087-6XX10
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Printed in the federal Republic of Germany
0996